WO2015087831A1 - Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device - Google Patents
Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2015087831A1 WO2015087831A1 PCT/JP2014/082413 JP2014082413W WO2015087831A1 WO 2015087831 A1 WO2015087831 A1 WO 2015087831A1 JP 2014082413 W JP2014082413 W JP 2014082413W WO 2015087831 A1 WO2015087831 A1 WO 2015087831A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- resin composition
- photosensitive resin
- acid
- ring
- Prior art date
Links
- 0 C*1=C*=CC1 Chemical compound C*1=C*=CC1 0.000 description 2
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08L—COMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
- C08L79/00—Compositions of macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming in the main chain of the macromolecule a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon only, not provided for in groups C08L61/00 - C08L77/00
- C08L79/04—Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain; Polyhydrazides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
- C08L79/08—Polyimides; Polyester-imides; Polyamide-imides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08G—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
- C08G73/00—Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon in the main chain of the macromolecule, not provided for in groups C08G12/00 - C08G71/00
- C08G73/06—Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain of the macromolecule
- C08G73/22—Polybenzoxazoles
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/133345—Insulating layers
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/039—Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
- G03F7/0392—Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists the macromolecular compound being present in a chemically amplified positive photoresist composition
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/075—Silicon-containing compounds
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/075—Silicon-containing compounds
- G03F7/0757—Macromolecular compounds containing Si-O, Si-C or Si-N bonds
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/26—Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
- G03F7/40—Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K50/00—Organic light-emitting devices
- H10K50/80—Constructional details
- H10K50/84—Passivation; Containers; Encapsulations
- H10K50/842—Containers
- H10K50/8426—Peripheral sealing arrangements, e.g. adhesives, sealants
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/124—Insulating layers formed between TFT elements and OLED elements
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a photosensitive resin composition (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “the composition of the present invention”). Moreover, it is related with the manufacturing method of the cured film using the said photosensitive resin composition, the cured film formed by hardening
- the present invention relates to an article and a method for producing a cured film using the article.
- Organic EL display devices, liquid crystal display devices, and the like are provided with a patterned interlayer insulating film.
- photosensitive resin compositions are widely used because the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small and sufficient flatness is obtained.
- the photosensitive resin composition for interlayer insulating films and interlayer insulating films in the display device are required to have high sensitivity, high resolution, high transparency, and solvent resistance.
- an attempt has been made to use an acrylic resin as a film forming component For example, those described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 are known.
- PBO Polybenzoxazole
- Patent Documents 3 to 5 have a problem that the adhesion to the substrate is lowered when exposed to a chemical solution used in the subsequent process of the insulating film. Further, it cannot be said that the transmittance is sufficiently high as a material for a display device.
- the present invention has been made in order to solve the above problems, and has excellent adhesion to a substrate, high transmittance, high heat resistance, and high sensitivity photosensitive resin composition, a method for producing a cured film, An object is to provide a cured film, a liquid crystal display device, and an organic EL display device.
- the present invention contains a polybenzoxazole precursor having an acid-decomposable group, a photoacid generator having a pKa of 4 or less, and a predetermined crosslinking agent.
- A a polybenzoxazole precursor containing a repeating unit represented by the general formula (1)
- B a photoacid generator in which the generated acid has a pKa of 4 or less
- C A photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent and
- D a crosslinking agent having two or more crosslinking groups that react with a benzene ring and / or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
- X represents a tetravalent organic group
- Y represents a divalent organic group.
- R 1 and R 2 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an acid-decomposable group, or -CORc, wherein Rc represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an acid-decomposable group.
- D The photosensitive resin composition as described in ⁇ 1> in which the crosslinkable group which a crosslinking agent has is selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group.
- A The photosensitive resin composition according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein the terminal of the polybenzoxazole precursor is a group represented by the general formula (1-1).
- the polybenzoxazole precursor includes m repeating units represented by the general formula (1-2) and n repeating units represented by the general formula (3), and m is 3
- the photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein n represents 0 to 1000, n represents 0 to 1000, and m + n is 3 to 1000.
- Formula (1-2) General formula (3) (In the general formulas (1-2) and (3), Y 1 is independently an arylene group, divalent cycloaliphatic group, divalent heterocyclic group, or these, —CH 2 —, oxygen Represents a group consisting of a combination of at least one of an atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, and X 1 represents an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring , An aliphatic ring, or a combination thereof with at least one of —CH 2 —, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and —C (CF 3 ) 2 — Each of Ra and Rb independently represents a hydrogen atom, an acid-decomposable group, an alkyl group or —CORc, and at least one of Ra or Rb is an acid-decomposable group.
- .X 2 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, an arylene group, 2 Heterocyclic group, a divalent cyclic aliphatic group or a thereof, -CH 2 -, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, -SO 2 -, - CO - , - NHCO-, and -C (CF 3) 2 Represents a group consisting of a combination of at least one of-.) ⁇ 5>
- the photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, further comprising an adhesion promoter.
- the photosensitive resin composition according to ⁇ 7>, wherein the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is a vinyl ether-based substituent.
- the group leaving by the action of an acid is an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an alkylsilyl group, a group constituting an acetal, or a group constituting a ketal. object.
- ⁇ 11> (4) The method for producing a cured film according to ⁇ 10>, comprising a step of exposing the entire surface of the developed photosensitive resin composition after the step of (4) developing and before the step of (5) post-baking.
- ⁇ 12> A cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive resin composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9> or a cured film formed by the method according to ⁇ 10> or ⁇ 11>.
- ⁇ 13> The cured film according to ⁇ 12>, which is an interlayer insulating film.
- ⁇ 14> A liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device having the cured film according to ⁇ 12> or ⁇ 13>.
- a photosensitive resin composition having excellent adhesion to a substrate, high transmittance, high heat resistance, and high sensitivity, a method for producing a cured film, a cured film, a liquid crystal display device, and an organic EL display device It became possible to provide.
- 1 is a conceptual diagram of a configuration of an example of a liquid crystal display device.
- 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of an active matrix substrate in a liquid crystal display device.
- 1 shows a conceptual diagram of a configuration of an example of an organic EL display device.
- 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a substrate in a bottom emission type organic EL display device.
- the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes what has a substituent with what does not have a substituent.
- the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
- (meth) acrylic acid means acrylic acid and / or methacrylic acid.
- the solid content concentration in the present invention refers to the solid content concentration at 25 ° C.
- a weight average molecular weight and a number average molecular weight are defined as a polystyrene conversion value by GPC measurement.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and TSKgel Super AWM-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 6) as a column.
- 0.0 mm ID ⁇ 15.0 cm can be determined by using a 10 mmol / L lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution as the eluent.
- Photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is (A) a polybenzoxazole precursor containing a repeating unit represented by the general formula (1), and (B) the generated acid has a pKa of 4 or less.
- General formula (1) In General Formula (1), X represents a tetravalent organic group, Y represents a divalent organic group.
- R 1 and R 2 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an acid-decomposable group, or -CORc, wherein Rc represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an acid-decomposable group.
- composition of the present invention By using the composition of the present invention, excellent adhesion to the substrate, high transmittance, high heat resistance, and high sensitivity are obtained. Although the details about this mechanism are unknown, by blending a crosslinking agent, the benzene ring or hydroxyl group of (A) polybenzoxazole precursor reacts with the crosslinking group of the crosslinking agent to produce a polymer. It is considered that high heat resistance can be achieved by forming a cross-linked structure between them.
- Patent Document 3 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-224970
- an oxetane group is used as a crosslinkable group.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is preferably used as a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition.
- the composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
- the composition of the present invention comprises (A) a polybenzoxazole precursor (hereinafter simply referred to as “(A) polybenzoxazole precursor”, “component (A)”) containing a repeating unit represented by the general formula (1). Sometimes).
- the repeating unit represented by the general formula (1) is a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
- the (A) polybenzoxazole precursor used in the present invention preferably has a crosslinkable group at the terminal.
- the terminal may be one terminal, but more preferably has a crosslinkable group at both terminals.
- the terminal of the polybenzoxazole precursor means the main chain terminal of the polybenzoxazole precursor.
- the repeating unit (a-1) having an acid-decomposable group is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (1).
- the polybenzoxazole precursor (A) used in the present invention may contain only one type of repeating unit represented by the general formula (1), or may contain two or more types.
- the polybenzoxazole precursor preferably contains 70 mol% or more, more preferably 80 mol% or more of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (1) with respect to all repeating units. Preferably it is 90 mol% or more.
- the polybenzoxazole precursor preferably contains a repeating unit containing an acid-decomposable group in a proportion of 50 to 100 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol% of all repeating units.
- X represents a tetravalent organic group
- Y represents a divalent organic group.
- R 1 and R 2 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an acid-decomposable group, or -CORc, wherein Rc represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an acid-decomposable group.
- X represents a tetravalent organic group.
- the tetravalent organic group represented by X is not particularly limited, but preferably has at least one or more cyclic structures, more preferably 1 to 2 cyclic structures.
- the cyclic structure may be any of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an aliphatic ring, and preferably includes an aromatic ring and / or a heterocyclic ring, and more preferably includes an aromatic ring. By setting it as such a cyclic structure, the effect of this invention is exhibited more effectively.
- the aromatic ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, and an anthracene ring.
- heterocyclic ring furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, pyrroline ring, pyrrolidine ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, imidazoline ring, imidazolidine ring, pyrazole ring, pyrazoline ring
- Examples include pyrazolidine ring, triazole ring, furazane ring, tetrazole ring, pyran ring, thiyne ring, pyridine ring, piperidine ring, oxazine ring, morpholine ring, thiazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperazine ring and triazine ring.
- the aliphatic ring examples include a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, and a cycloheptane ring.
- the ring may be condensed, —O—, —S—, a fluorine-substituted alkylene group (preferably —C (CF 3 ) 2 —), —CH 2 — , —SO 2 —, or —NHCO— may be bonded to a plurality of cyclic structures via a linking group.
- the linking group is preferably —O—, —S—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —SO 2 —, or —NHCO—, where —C (CF 3 ) 2 — is More preferred.
- the X moiety preferably contains a fluorine-substituted alkylene group. By including a fluorine-substituted alkylene group, the transparency of the composition of the present invention tends to be further improved.
- X include, but are not limited to, the following.
- X 1 represents a linking group.
- NH and R 1 bonded to X, and NH and R 2 are preferably bonded so as to be in the ortho position (adjacent position) in the cyclic structure.
- X is preferably (2) or (10), more preferably (2).
- X 1 is a fluorine-substituted alkylene group (preferably —C (CF 3 ) 2 —), since the transparency of the composition of the present invention is further improved.
- R 1 and R 2 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an acid-decomposable group, or —CORc. At least one of R 1 and R 2 is an acid-decomposable group.
- the alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and in the case of a linear or branched alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms Is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- an alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkyl group having 5 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 5 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- Specific examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an octyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a norbornyl group, and an adamantyl group.
- the substituent include a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amide group, and a sulfonylamide group.
- An acid-decomposable group is a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid, or a group that leaves by the action of an acid to generate an alkali-soluble group such as a hydroxyl group or a carboxyl group, such as —C (R 5 ) 2 —COOR 4.
- R 5 independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
- R 4 represents a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid.
- the acid acting as an acid usually means an acid generated from an acid generator described later.
- Examples of the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid include vinyl ether substituents, alkoxycarbonyl groups (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), alkoxyalkyl groups (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), alkylsilyl groups (preferably carbon atoms). And a group constituting an acetal or a ketal. From the viewpoint of sensitivity, an acetal group or a ketal group is preferable. As group which comprises acetal or ketal, what has the following structure is mentioned, for example. (In the formula, R 1x and R 2x each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and at least one of R 1x and R 2x represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- R 3x represents an alkyl group. Alternatively, it represents an aryl group, and R 1x or R 2x and R 3x may be linked to form a cyclic ether.
- the alkyl group represented by R 1x and R 2x is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group represented by R 1x and R 2x is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group.
- R 1x and R 2x are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- R 3X represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- aryl group an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid include alkoxycarbonyl groups such as t-butoxycarbonyl group, alkoxyalkyl groups such as methoxymethyl group and ethoxyethyl group, alkylsilyl groups such as methylsilyl group and ethylsilyl group, tetrahydro Pyranyl group, tetrahydrofuranyl group, alkoxy-substituted tetrahydropyranyl group, alkoxy-substituted tetrahydrofuranyl group and the like are exemplified as typical examples, but are not limited thereto.
- the most preferable group as a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is an ethoxyethyl group, a tetrahydropyranyl group or a tetrahydrofuranyl group. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the structure of a group preferable as a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is shown.
- Rc represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and these groups may or may not have a substituent.
- the alkyl group represented by Rc has the same meaning as the alkyl group represented by R 1 and R 2 , and the preferred range is also the same.
- the aryl group represented by Rc is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, a mesityl group, and a naphthyl group.
- the substituent that the aryl group may have is the same as the substituent that the alkyl group may have.
- Y represents a divalent organic group.
- the divalent organic group represented by Y is not particularly limited, but preferably has at least one cyclic structure, and more preferably has 1 to 2 cyclic structures.
- the cyclic structure may be any of an arylene group, a divalent cyclic aliphatic group, and a divalent heterocyclic group, and preferably includes an arylene group and / or a divalent heterocyclic ring, and includes an arylene group. It is more preferable.
- the divalent organic group represented by Y includes an arylene group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, a divalent heterocyclic group, or a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2.
- arylene group an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an arylene group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- Specific examples of the arylene group include a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,2-phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
- Examples of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group include a cyclic alkylene group, a cyclic alkenylene group, and a cyclic alkynylene group.
- a cyclic alkylene group an alkylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- the cyclic alkenylene group is preferably an alkenylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, and further preferably a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms.
- cyclic alkynylene group a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- divalent cycloaliphatic group include 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,3-cyclohexylene group, 1,2-cyclohexylene group, and octylene group.
- the divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered heterocyclic ring.
- a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferable, and a 6-membered ring is more preferable.
- a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable.
- the heterocycle is preferably an aromatic heterocycle.
- the aromatic heterocyclic ring is generally an unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and an unsaturated heterocyclic ring having the most double bond is more preferable.
- heterocycles include furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, pyrroline ring, pyrrolidine ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, imidazoline ring, imidazolidine ring, pyrazole ring, Pyrazoline ring, pyrazolidine ring, triazole ring, furazane ring, tetrazole ring, pyran ring, thiyne ring, pyridine ring, piperidine ring, oxazine ring, morpholine ring, thiazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperazine ring and triazine ring Is included.
- Y represents an arylene group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, a divalent heterocyclic group, or a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and — C (CF 3) 2 - in can be a group comprising a combination of at least one, and specific examples thereof include the following groups.
- A represents a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, or —C (CF 3 ) 2 —.
- Y is preferably 1,4-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, 1,2-phenylene group or octylene group.
- each Y 1 independently represents an arylene group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, a divalent heterocyclic group, or these, —CH 2 —, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom.
- Ra and Rb each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an acid-decomposable group or —CORc, and at least one of Ra or Rb is an acid-decomposable group, where Rc is an alkyl group or an aryl group Represents a group.
- Y 1 is independently an arylene group, divalent cycloaliphatic group, divalent heterocyclic group, or a methylene group, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO. And a group consisting of a combination with at least one of — and —C (CF 3 ) 2 —.
- arylene group an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an arylene group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- the arylene group include a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,2-phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
- the divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered heterocyclic ring. A 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferable, and a 6-membered ring is more preferable.
- the hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic ring a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable.
- the heterocycle is preferably an aromatic heterocycle.
- the aromatic heterocycle is generally an unsaturated heterocycle.
- An unsaturated heterocyclic ring having the most double bond is more preferable.
- Specific heterocycles include furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, pyrroline ring, pyrrolidine ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, imidazoline ring, imidazolidine ring, pyrazole ring, Pyrazoline ring, pyrazolidine ring, triazole ring, furazane ring, tetrazole ring, pyran ring, thiyne ring, pyridine ring, piperidine ring, oxazine ring, morpholine ring, thiazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperazine ring and triazine ring Is included.
- Examples of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group include a cyclic alkylene group, a cyclic alkenylene group, and a cyclic alkynylene group.
- a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- cyclic alkenylene group a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- cyclic alkynylene group a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- divalent cycloaliphatic group examples include 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,3-cyclohexylene group, 1,2-cyclohexylene group, and octylene group.
- Y 1 represents an arylene group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, or a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and -C (CF 3) 2 - in can be a group comprising a combination of at least one of these and, -C (CF 3) 2 -, more preferably a group consisting of an arylene group And more preferably a group consisting of a combination of —C (CF 3 ) 2 —.
- Y 1 is preferably a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,2-phenylene group, an octylene group, or the following exemplified compounds, and includes a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, , 2-phenylene group and octylene group are more preferable.
- X 1 represents an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring, or these, and —CH 2 —, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and —C (CF 3 2 ) represents a tetravalent group consisting of a combination of at least one of-.
- X 1 preferably has at least one of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an aliphatic ring, and more preferably has one or two of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an aliphatic ring. preferable.
- X 1 preferably contains an aromatic ring and / or a heterocyclic ring, and more preferably contains an aromatic ring.
- the aromatic ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, and an anthracene ring.
- heterocyclic ring furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, pyrroline ring, pyrrolidine ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, imidazoline ring, imidazolidine ring, pyrazole ring, pyrazoline ring
- Examples include pyrazolidine ring, triazole ring, furazane ring, tetrazole ring, pyran ring, thiyne ring, pyridine ring, piperidine ring, oxazine ring, morpholine ring, thiazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperazine ring and triazine ring.
- the aliphatic ring examples include a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, and a cycloheptane ring.
- the ring may be condensed, and —O—, —S—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —CH 2 — , —SO 2 —, or —NHCO— may be bonded to a plurality of cyclic structures via a linking group.
- the linking group is preferably —O—, —S—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —SO 2 —, or —NHCO—, where —C (CF 3 ) 2 — is More preferred.
- Ra and Rb each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an acid-decomposable group, or —CORc, and are synonymous with R 1 and R 2 in the general formula (1), and their preferred ranges are also the same.
- —X 1 (ORa) (ORb) — in the repeating unit represented by the general formula (1-2) include, but are not limited to, the following.
- X 1 represents a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, or —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, and —C (CF 3 ) 2 — is preferable.
- R represents one of Ra and Rb.
- NH and ORa which are bonded to X, and NH and ORb are preferably bonded so as to be in the ortho position (adjacent position) in the cyclic structure.
- X is preferably (2) or (10), more preferably (2).
- the polybenzoxazole precursor having an acid-decomposable group may contain other repeating units in addition to (a-1) the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
- Examples of other repeating units include a repeating unit represented by the general formula (2), a repeating unit represented by the general formula (3), and a repeating unit represented by the general formula (4).
- ⁇ Repeating unit represented by formula (2) >>> General formula (2) (In the general formula (2), X represents a tetravalent organic group and Y represents a divalent organic group.
- R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or —CORc. Rc represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, except that R 3 and R 4 are acid-decomposable groups.)
- X, Y, R 3 , R 4 , and Rc have the same meanings as X, Y 1 , Ra, Rb, and Rc in general formula (1-2), and the preferred ranges are also the same. It is.
- Y 1 is independently an arylene group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, a divalent heterocyclic group, or these, —CH 2 —, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, — Represents a group composed of a combination with at least one of SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, and X 2 represents an arylene group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent group, Or a cyclic aliphatic group of the above, or at least one of —CH 2 —, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and —C (CF 3 ) 2 —.
- Y 1 have the same meanings as defined in formula (1-2) Y 1 in the preferred range is also the same.
- X 2 represents an arylene group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, or a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO -, - NHCO-, and -C (CF 3) 2 - of a group consisting of a combination of at least one, these radicals may contain a silicon atom.
- An arylene group represented by X 2 , a divalent heterocyclic group, and a divalent cyclic aliphatic group are an arylene group represented by Y 1 in formula (1-2), a divalent heterocyclic group, and a divalent cyclic group. It is synonymous with an aliphatic group, and its preferable range is also the same.
- X 2 represents an arylene group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, a divalent heterocyclic group, or a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and
- the group may be a combination of at least one of —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, and specific examples thereof include the following groups.
- A represents a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, or —C (CF 3 ) 2 —.
- Y 1 represents an arylene group, divalent cycloaliphatic group, divalent heterocyclic group, or these, —CH 2 —, oxygen atom, sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO Represents a group composed of a combination of at least one of —, —NHCO—, and —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, and X 3 represents a group containing a silicon atom.
- Y 1 has the same meaning as Y 1 in formula (1-2), and the preferred range is also the same.
- X 3 is preferably a group represented by the following. (R 5 and R 6 each independently represent a divalent organic group, and R 7 and R 8 each independently represent a monovalent organic group.)
- the divalent organic group represented by R 5 and R 6 is not particularly limited, but may be a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and a substituent, which may have a specific substituent.
- As the linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- Specific examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, an isopropylene group, a butylene group, and a t-butylene group.
- arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms an arylene group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- Specific examples of the arylene group include a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,2-phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
- the divalent cycloaliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably a divalent cycloaliphatic group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a divalent cycloaliphatic group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the divalent cycloaliphatic group include a 1,4-cyclohexylene group, a 1,3-cyclohexylene group, and a 1,2-cyclohexylene group.
- These linear or branched alkylene groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, arylene groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and divalent cyclic aliphatic groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms may have a substituent.
- Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amide group, and a sulfonylamide group.
- the group formed by combining a straight chain or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a divalent cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is not particularly limited.
- a group formed by combining groups formed by combining divalent cycloaliphatic groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable.
- Specific examples of the group formed by combining a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or a divalent cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms are as follows: Although the following are mentioned, it is not limited to these.
- the monovalent organic group represented by R 7 and R 8 represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
- the aryl group which may have a substituent is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, a mesityl group, and a naphthyl group. These linear or branched alkyl groups and aryl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms may have a substituent.
- the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amide group, and a sulfonylamide group.
- X 3 include the following, but are not limited thereto.
- the polybenzoxazole precursor (A) used in the present invention includes m repeating units represented by the general formula (1-2) and n repeating units represented by the general formula (3).
- M represents 3 to 1000, preferably 5 to 300, and more preferably 10 to 100.
- n represents 0 to 1000, preferably 0 to 300, and more preferably 0 to 100.
- m + n represents 3 to 1000, preferably 5 to 600, and more preferably 10 to 200.
- the repeating unit represented by the general formula (1-2) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (3) may be so-called random polymers.
- the repeating unit represented by the general formula (1-2) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (3) may each include one type or two or more types. Further, a repeating unit other than the repeating unit represented by the general formula (1-2) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (3) may be included. However, such other repeating units are preferably 5 mol% or less of all repeating units.
- the polybenzoxazole precursor in the present invention can have an embodiment having a crosslinkable group at the terminal.
- membrane hardness can be improved.
- the terminal having a crosslinkable group may be one terminal, but is preferably both terminals.
- the terminal of a polybenzoxazole precursor is not specifically limited, It is preferable that a crosslinkable group is included.
- the crosslinkable group is preferably a group containing at least one selected from an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, a carbon-carbon unsaturated bond group, and a blocked isocyanate group.
- the terminal of the (A) polybenzoxazole precursor in the present invention is preferably a group represented by the general formula (1-1).
- Z represents a single bond, a carbon atom or a sulfur atom, preferably a single bond or a carbon atom.
- R 11 represents a monovalent organic group.
- the monovalent organic group represented by R 11 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include those having a formula weight of 20 to 500 per molecule.
- the atom constituting the monovalent organic group represented by R 11 is preferably selected from a carbon atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a hydrogen atom, and a sulfur atom, and a carbon atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, and a hydrogen atom More preferably, it is selected from.
- R 11 is an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms) or an alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms).
- An alkynyl group (preferably having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having a carbon number) 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), carboxyl group, crosslinkable group, oxygen atom, carbonyl group, sulfonyl group, arylene group (preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 6 carbon atoms) 10) an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), A nylene group (preferably having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and an alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group, carbonyl group, carboxyl group, crosslinkable group,
- the crosslinkable group represented by R 11 is synonymous with the crosslinkable group described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
- These groups may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amide group, and a sulfonylamide group.
- the terminal of the polybenzoxazole precursor is not a crosslinkable group, it may be sealed with a sealing group.
- a sealing group in this case is an acetyl group.
- the polybenzoxazole precursor has no crosslinkable group at the terminal.
- the polybenzoxazole precursor (A) has a weight average molecular weight of preferably 3000 to 200,000, more preferably 4000 to 100,000, and most preferably 5000 to 50000. By setting it as this range, the lithography performance and the cured film physical properties can be made excellent.
- the weight average molecular weight is defined by a polystyrene conversion value of gel permeation chromatography.
- the number average molecular weight of the (A) polybenzoxazole precursor is preferably 1000 to 50000, more preferably 2000 to 40000, and still more preferably 3000 to 30000.
- the number average molecular weight is defined as a polystyrene equivalent value of gel permeation chromatography.
- the polybenzoxazole precursor (A) used in the present invention can be configured to contain substantially no crosslinkable group other than the terminal. “Substantially free” means that the repeating unit containing a crosslinkable group is 1 mol% or less of all repeating units.
- the content of the (A) polybenzoxazole precursor in the composition of the present invention is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass, and particularly preferably 70% by mass or more in terms of solid content.
- the total amount becomes the said range.
- the polybenzoxazole precursor used in the present invention can be synthesized in consideration of the description in JP-A-2008-224907. Further, in the present invention, it is preferable to seal the polybenzoxazole precursor with a group represented by the general formula (1-1), but such terminal blocking was performed by synthesizing a resin having a terminal amino group. Later, the terminal amino group is bonded through a carbonyl group or a sulfonyl group, capped as an amide with an acid anhydride or acid derivative, or a monofunctional amine or acid chloride is mixed in the polymerization reaction. Can be synthesized at once.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention contains a photoacid generator (B) that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less.
- a highly transparent cured film can be obtained.
- the photoacid generator used in the present invention is preferably a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 to 450 nm and generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, but is limited by its chemical structure. It is not something.
- a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
- a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less is more preferable, and a photoacid generator that generates an acid of 2 or less is more preferable. Further, when a strong acid having a pKa of 2 or less is used, there is an effect of improving heat resistance.
- pKa basically refers to pKa in water at 25 ° C. Those that cannot be measured in water refer to those measured after changing to a solvent suitable for measurement. Specifically, the pKa described in the chemical handbook can be referred to.
- Examples of the photoacid generator include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, sulfonium salts and iodonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, it is preferable to use an oxime sulfonate compound or an imide sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity and insulating properties. These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
- trichloromethyl-s-triazines diaryliodonium salts, triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, imidosulfonate compounds, and diazomethane derivatives
- diazomethane derivatives include paragraph numbers 0083 to 0088 of JP2011-212494A, The compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0065 to 0072 of WO11 / 087011 can be exemplified, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
- the triarylsulfonium salt a triarylsulfonium salt having the following structure can be preferably used.
- each R independently represents a group consisting of a hydrogen atom and a carbon atom and / or an oxygen atom (excluding other than C, H and O), and the sum of the carbon atom and the oxygen atom is 16 or less.
- R 1 represents a monovalent organic group having 16 or less carbon atoms.
- R independently represents a group consisting of a hydrogen atom and a carbon atom and / or an oxygen atom (excluding other than C, H and O), and the sum of the carbon atom and the oxygen atom is 16 or less.
- R is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkylene oxide group having 8 or less carbon atoms.
- R 1 represents a monovalent organic group having 16 or less carbon atoms.
- R 1 preferably does not contain other than C, H, O, and F. Examples of R 1 include a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a propyl group, a phenyl group, and a tosyl group.
- imide sulfonate compound examples include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0065 to 0075 of WO2011 / 087011, and the following compounds.
- Preferred examples of the oxime sulfonate compound that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure include compounds having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following general formula (B1-1).
- General formula (B1-1) (In the general formula (B1-1), R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. The wavy line represents a bond with another group.)
- any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear, branched or cyclic. Acceptable substituents are described below.
- the alkyl group for R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group represented by R 21 has a halogen atom, an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a cycloalkyl group (7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group). It may be substituted with a bridged alicyclic group, preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like.
- aryl group for R 21 an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms is preferable, and a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferable.
- the aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with a lower alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom.
- the compound containing the oxime sulfonate structure represented by the general formula (B1-1) is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound represented by the following general formula (B1-2).
- General formula (B1-2) (In the formula (B1-2), R 42 represents an optionally substituted alkyl group or aryl group, X represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom, and m4 represents 0-3. Represents an integer, and when m4 is 2 or 3, a plurality of Xs may be the same or different.
- the alkyl group as X is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- the alkoxy group as X is preferably a linear or branched alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- the halogen atom as X is preferably a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom.
- m4 is preferably 0 or 1.
- m4 is 1, X is a methyl group, the substitution position of X is an ortho position, R 42 is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 7, A compound which is a 7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornylmethyl group or a p-toluyl group is particularly preferred.
- the compound containing an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the general formula (B1-1) is also preferably an oxime sulfonate compound represented by the following general formula (B1-3).
- General formula (B1-3) (In the formula (B1-3), R 43 has the same meaning as R 42 in the formula (B1-2), and X 1 is a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Represents an alkoxy group, a cyano group or a nitro group, and n4 represents an integer of 0 to 5.)
- R 43 in the above general formula (B1-3) is methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, n-butyl group, n-octyl group, trifluoromethyl group, pentafluoroethyl group, perfluoro-n—.
- a propyl group, a perfluoro-n-butyl group, a p-tolyl group, a 4-chlorophenyl group or a pentafluorophenyl group is preferable, and an n-octyl group is particularly preferable.
- X 1 is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methoxy group.
- n4 is preferably from 0 to 2, particularly preferably from 0 to 1.
- the description in paragraphs 0080 to 0082 of JP2012-163937A can be referred to. Incorporated in the description.
- the compound containing an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the general formula (B1-1) is also preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OS-1).
- R 101 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfo group, a cyano group, an aryl group, or Represents a heteroaryl group.
- R102 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- X 101 represents —O—, —S—, —NH—, —NR 105 —, —CH 2 —, —CR 106 H—, or —CR 105 R 107 —, wherein R 105 to R 107 are alkyl groups.
- R 121 to R 124 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an amide group, a sulfo group, a cyano group, Or an aryl group is represented. Two of R 121 to R 124 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
- R 121 to R 124 are preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom and an alkyl group, and an embodiment in which at least two of R 121 to R 124 are bonded to each other to form an aryl group is also preferred. Among these, an embodiment in which R 121 to R 124 are all hydrogen atoms is preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Any of the aforementioned functional groups may further have a substituent.
- the compound represented by the general formula (OS-1) is, for example, a compound represented by the general formula (OS-2) described in paragraph numbers 0087 to 0089 of JP2012-163937A Which is incorporated herein by reference.
- the compound represented by the general formula (OS-1) that can be suitably used in the present invention include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0128 to 0132 of JP2011-221494A (exemplified compounds b-1 to b-34), but the present invention is not limited thereto.
- the compound containing the oxime sulfonate structure represented by the general formula (B1-1) is represented by the following general formula (OS-3), the following general formula (OS-4), or the following general formula (OS- The oxime sulfonate compound represented by 5) is preferred.
- R 22 , R 25 and R 28 each independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl group
- R 23 , R 26 and R 29 Each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a halogen atom
- R 24 , R 27 and R 30 each independently represent a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkyloxy group, a sulfonic acid group, an aminosulfonyl group or an alkoxysulfonyl group.
- X 1 to X 3 each independently represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
- n 1 to n 3 each independently represents 1 or 2
- m 1 to m 3 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 6 Represents.
- oxime sulfonate compound represented by the general formula (OS-3) to the general formula (OS-5) include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0114 to 0120 of JP2011-221494A. The contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. The present invention is not limited to these.
- the compound containing an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the general formula (B1-1) is also preferably an oxime sulfonate compound represented by the following general formula (B1-4).
- General formula (B1-4) (In the general formula (B1-4), R 1 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, R 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group. R 3 to R 6 each represents a hydrogen atom. Represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a halogen atom, provided that R 3 and R 4 , R 4 and R 5 , or R 5 and R 6 may combine to form an alicyclic ring or aromatic ring. , -O- or S-.
- R 1 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- the alkyl group is preferably a branched alkyl group or a cyclic alkyl group.
- the alkyl group preferably has 3 to 10 carbon atoms. In particular, when the alkyl group has a branched structure, an alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable. When the alkyl group has a cyclic structure, an alkyl group having 5 to 7 carbon atoms is preferable.
- alkyl group examples include propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, s-butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, isopentyl group, neopentyl group, 1,1-dimethylpropyl group, hexyl group. 2-ethylhexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group and the like, preferably isopropyl group, tert-butyl group, neopentyl group, and cyclohexyl group.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 7 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, and a phenyl group is preferable.
- the alkyl group and aryl group represented by R 1 may have a substituent.
- substituents examples include a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chloro atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, Aryl group, acyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, cyano group, carboxyl group, hydroxyl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyloxy group, amino group, A nitro group, a hydrazino group, a heterocyclic group, etc. are mentioned. Further, these groups may be further substituted. Preferably, they are a halogen atom and a methyl group.
- R 1 is preferably an alkyl group from the viewpoint of transparency, and R 1 has a branched structure having 3 to 6 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of achieving both storage stability and sensitivity.
- An alkyl group, an alkyl group having a cyclic structure having 5 to 7 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group is preferable, and an alkyl group having a branched structure having 3 to 6 carbon atoms or an alkyl group having a cyclic structure having 5 to 7 carbon atoms is more preferable. .
- an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, and a cyclohexyl group are preferable, and a tert-butyl group and a cyclohexyl group are more preferable.
- R 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.
- the alkyl group represented by R 2 is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a neopentyl group, a hexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. It is a group.
- As the aryl group an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
- Examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a p-toluyl group (p-methylphenyl group), and a phenyl group and a p-toluyl group are preferable.
- Examples of the heteroaryl group include a pyrrole group, an indole group, a carbazole group, a furan group, and a thiophene group.
- the alkyl group, aryl group, and heteroaryl group represented by R 2 may have a substituent. As a substituent, it is synonymous with the substituent which the alkyl group and aryl group which R ⁇ 1 > may have.
- R 2 is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably an aryl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
- As the substituent for the phenyl group a methyl group is preferred.
- R 3 to R 6 each represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chloro atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom).
- the alkyl group represented by R 3 to R 6 has the same meaning as the alkyl group represented by R 2 , and the preferred range is also the same.
- the aryl group represented by R 3 to R 6 has the same meaning as the aryl group represented by R 1 , and the preferred range is also the same.
- R 3 to R 6 may combine to form a ring, and the ring may form an alicyclic ring or an aromatic ring. It is preferable that a benzene ring is more preferable.
- R 3 to R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chloro atom, bromine atom), or R 3 and R 4 , R 4 and R 5 , or R 5 and R 6.
- a benzene ring is preferably formed, and a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a fluorine atom, a chloro atom, a bromine atom, or R 3 and R 4 , R 4 and R 5 , or R 5 and R 6 are combined to form a benzene ring Is more preferable.
- Preferred embodiments of R 3 to R 6 are as follows.
- At least two are hydrogen atoms.
- the number of alkyl groups, aryl groups, or halogen atoms is one or less.
- Aspect 3) R 3 and R 4 , R 4 and R 5 , or R 5 and R 6 are combined to form a benzene ring.
- X represents —O— or S—.
- Ts represents a tosyl group (p-toluenesulfonyl group)
- Me represents a methyl group
- Bu represents an n-butyl group
- Ph represents a phenyl group.
- the content of the (B) photoacid generator is preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid components in the photosensitive resin composition. 5 to 10 parts by mass is more preferable, and 0.5 to 5 parts by mass is even more preferable. Only 1 type may be used for a photo-acid generator, and it can also use 2 or more types together. A photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When using 2 or more types of photo-acid generators, the total amount becomes the said range.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention contains (C) a solvent.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is preferably prepared as a solution in which the essential components of the present invention and further optional components described below are dissolved in a solvent.
- a solvent used for the preparation of the composition of the present invention a solvent that uniformly dissolves essential components and optional components and does not react with each component is used.
- known solvents can be used, such as ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl.
- Ethers propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers such as diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, Dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol mono Ruki ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, lactones such as ⁇ - butyrolactone, pyrrolidones and the like.
- the solvent used in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention include the solvents described in paragraph numbers 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-221494A, and paragraph numbers 0167 to of JP2012-194290A. Also included are the solvents described in 0168, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- the solvent that can be used in the present invention is a single type or a combination of two or more types, more preferably a combination of two types, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates or dialkyl ethers, diacetates. It is more preferable to use a combination of styrene and diethylene glycol dialkyl ether or an ester and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetate.
- the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof.
- Solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C. include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), propylene glycol An example is methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
- Solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
- the content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is preferably 50 to 98 parts by mass and more preferably 60 to 95 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of all components in the photosensitive resin composition. It is preferably 70 to 90 parts by mass.
- a solvent may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When two or more kinds of solvents are used, the total amount falls within the above range.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention has at least one cross-linking agent (hereinafter also referred to as “(D) cross-linking agent”) having two or more cross-linkable groups composed of groups that react with a benzene ring and / or a phenolic hydroxyl group. Contains seeds.
- the crosslinking agent reacts with a benzene ring or a phenolic hydroxyl group contained in the polybenzoxazole precursor to form a crosslinked structure between the polybenzoxazoles.
- the crosslinkable group composed of a group that reacts with a benzene ring or a phenolic hydroxyl group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group.
- each crosslinkable group may be the same or different.
- the crosslinkable groups contained in one molecule are the same.
- the (D) crosslinking agent used in the present invention is preferably a crosslinking agent having two or more crosslinking groups selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group, and an epoxy group and / or More preferably, it has an alkoxymethyl group. More specifically, (D) the crosslinking agent includes a compound having two or more epoxy groups in the molecule, a crosslinking agent containing two or more alkoxymethyl groups and / or methylol groups in the molecule, Preferred examples include compounds containing two or more blocked isocyanate groups.
- crosslinking agents can react with the phenolic hydroxyl group or benzene ring of component (A) to crosslink components (A), and this crosslinking reaction is caused by the acid generated from the acid generator. Since it accelerates
- the molecular weight of the crosslinking agent used in the present invention is preferably 150 to 30000, and more preferably 200 to 10000. By setting it as such a range, the effect of this invention is exhibited more effectively.
- the content of the crosslinking agent (D) in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the component (A), and 3 to 30 parts by mass. More preferred is 5 to 20 parts by mass. By adding in this range, a cured film having excellent mechanical strength and solvent resistance can be obtained.
- a plurality of (D) crosslinking agents can be used in combination. In that case, the content is calculated by adding all (D) crosslinking agents.
- the photosensitive resin composition of this invention can also use together crosslinking agents other than the said (D) crosslinking agent. In that case, the proportion of the (D) crosslinking agent in the entire crosslinking agent is preferably 50% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more.
- numerator can be used as (D) crosslinking agent.
- Specific examples of compounds having two or more epoxy groups in the molecule include bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, phenol novolac type epoxy resins, cresol novolac type epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins, and epoxy group containing An acrylic resin having a structural unit can be given.
- JER152, JER157S70, JER157S65, JER806, JER828, JER1007 are commercially available products described in paragraph No. 0189 of JP2011-221494, etc.
- crosslinking agent containing two or more alkoxymethyl groups or methylol groups in the molecule is a crosslinking agent having two or more structures represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2) in the molecule. , One or both of an alkoxymethyl group and a methylol group are contained in the molecule in a total of two or more.
- -CH 2 OR 1 (1) In the formula, R 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methyl group.
- the alkoxymethyl group or methylol group is preferably bonded to a nitrogen atom or a carbon atom forming an aromatic ring.
- Alkoxymethylated melamine, alkoxymethylated benzoguanamine, alkoxymethylated glycoluril, and alkoxymethylated urea convert methylolated melamine, methylolated benzoguanamine, methylolated glycoluril, or methylol group of methylolated urea to alkoxymethyl group, respectively.
- Examples of the alkoxymethyl group include a methoxymethyl group, an ethoxymethyl group, a propoxymethyl group, and a butoxymethyl group, and the methoxymethyl group is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of outgas generation amount.
- alkoxymethylated melamine, methylolated melamine, alkoxymethylated benzoguanamine, methylolated benzoguanamine, alkoxymethylated glycoluril, methylolated glycoluril are mentioned as preferred crosslinkable compounds, from the viewpoint of transparency Alkoxymethylated glycoluril and methylolated glycoluril are particularly preferred.
- the alkoxymethyl group-containing crosslinking agent described in paragraph No. 0107 of JP2012-8223A can be preferably used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
- Preferred structures of the crosslinking agent containing two or more alkoxymethyl groups or methylol groups in the molecule include compounds represented by the following formulas (8-1) to (8-4).
- R 7 and R each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms
- R 8 to R 11 each independently represents Represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group or an alkoxyl group
- X 2 represents a single bond, a methylene group or an oxygen atom.
- the alkyl group represented by R 7 and R has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group.
- the alkyl group represented by R 8 to R 11 preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group.
- the alkoxyl group represented by R 8 to R 11 preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, and a propoxy group.
- X 2 is preferably a single bond or a methylene group.
- R 7 to R 11 and X 2 may be substituted with an alkyl group such as a methyl group or an ethyl group, or a halogen atom.
- a plurality of R 7 , R, and R 8 to R 11 may be the same or different.
- Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (8-2) include N, N, N, N-tetramethylolglycoluril, N, N, N, N-tetramethylolglycoluril having 1 to 1 methylol groups. 4 methoxymethylated compounds, N, N, N, N-tetramethylolglycoluril methylol group having 1 to 4 ethoxymethylated compounds, N, N, N, N-tetramethylolglycoluril methylol N-propoxymethylated compounds having 1 to 4 groups, isopropoxymethylated compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups in N, N, N, N-tetramethylolglycoluril, N, N, N, N -N-butoxymethylated compound having 1 to 4 methylol groups of tetramethylol glycoluril, N, N, N, N-tetramethylolglycol Methylol groups
- Ruuriru can be exemplified
- Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (8-4) include N, N, N, N, N, N-hexamethylol melamine, N, N, N, N, N-hexamethylol melamine.
- 1-6 methoxymethylated methylol groups 1-6 methoxymethylated methylol groups of N, N, N, N, N, N-hexamethylolmelamine, N, N, N, N, N, N-hexamethylolmelamine 1-6 methylol groups n-propoxymethylated, N, N, N, N, N, N-hexamethylolmelamine 1-6 methylol groups isopropoxymethyl Compound, N, N, N, N, N, N-hexamethylol compound in which 1 to 6 methylol groups of melamine are n-butoxymethylated, N, N, N, N, N-hexamethylol Mela Methylol groups of the emission can be cited 1-6 ter
- X represents a single bond or a monovalent to tetravalent organic group
- R 11 and R 12 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
- n is an integer of 1 to 4.
- p and q are each independently an integer of 0 to 4.
- two Y's are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and may contain an oxygen atom or a fluorine atom
- R 13 to R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom.
- m and n are each independently an integer of 1 to 3
- p and q are each independently an integer of 0 to 4.
- Crosslinking agents containing two or more alkoxymethyl groups or methylol groups in these molecules are also available as commercial products, for example, Cymel 300, 301, 303, 370, 325, 327, 701, 266, 267, 238, 1141, 272, 202, 1156, 1158, 1123, 1170, 1174, UFR65, 300 (above, manufactured by Mitsui Cyanamid Co., Ltd.), Nicalac MX-750, -032, -706, -708, -40 , -31, -270, -280, -290, -750LM, Nicarak MS-11, Nicarak MW-30HM, -100LM, -270, -390 (above, manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd.) can do. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- a compound containing two or more blocked isocyanate groups in the molecule can be used as the (D) crosslinking agent.
- the blocked isocyanate group in the present invention is a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat.
- a group obtained by reacting a blocking agent with an isocyanate group to protect the isocyanate group can be preferably exemplified.
- the blocked isocyanate group is preferably a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat at 90 ° C. to 250 ° C.
- the skeleton of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, and any skeleton having two or more isocyanate groups in one molecule may be used, and may be aliphatic, alicyclic or aromatic.
- tolylene diisocyanate (TDI), diphenylmethane diisocyanate (MDI), hexamethylene diisocyanate (HDI), and isophorone diisocyanate (IPDI) are particularly preferable.
- the matrix structure of the blocked isocyanate compound in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention include biuret type, isocyanurate type, adduct type, and bifunctional prepolymer type.
- the blocking agent that forms the block structure of the blocked isocyanate compound include oxime compounds, lactam compounds, phenol compounds, alcohol compounds, amine compounds, active methylene compounds, pyrazole compounds, mercaptan compounds, imidazole compounds, and imide compounds. be able to.
- a blocking agent selected from oxime compounds, lactam compounds, phenol compounds, alcohol compounds, amine compounds, active methylene compounds, and pyrazole compounds is particularly preferable.
- Examples of the oxime compound include oxime and ketoxime, and specific examples include acetoxime, formaldoxime, cyclohexane oxime, methyl ethyl ketone oxime, cyclohexanone oxime, benzophenone oxime, and acetoxime.
- Examples of the lactam compound include ⁇ -caprolactam and ⁇ -butyrolactam.
- Examples of the phenol compound include phenol, naphthol, cresol, xylenol, and halogen-substituted phenol.
- Examples of the alcohol compound include methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, cyclohexanol, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, and alkyl lactate.
- Examples of the amine compound include primary amines and secondary amines, which may be aromatic amines, aliphatic amines, and alicyclic amines, and examples thereof include aniline, diphenylamine, ethyleneimine, and polyethyleneimine.
- Examples of the active methylene compound include diethyl malonate, dimethyl malonate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl acetoacetate and the like.
- Examples of the pyrazole compound include pyrazole, methylpyrazole, dimethylpyrazole and the like.
- Examples of the mercaptan compound include alkyl mercaptans and aryl mercaptans.
- the blocked isocyanate compound that can be used in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is commercially available.
- Coronate AP Stable M Coronate 2503, 2515, 2507, 2513, 2555, Millionate MS-50 (or more, Nippon Polyurethane Industry Co., Ltd.), Takenate B-830, B-815N, B-820NSU, B-842N, B-84N, B-870N, B-874N, B-882N (above, manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.) ), Duranate 17B-60PX, 17B-60P, TPA-B80X, TPA-B80E, MF-B60X, MF-B60B, MF-K60X, MF-K60B, E402-B80B, SBN-70D, SBB-70P, K6000 (above , Manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation, Death Module B 1100, BL1265 MPA / X, BL
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may use a compound containing a methacryloyl group or an acryloyl group as a crosslinking agent other than the (D) crosslinking agent, together with the (D) crosslinking agent.
- the compound containing a methacryloyl group or an acryloyl group is a compound selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid esters and methacrylic acid esters. It is preferable that the acryloyl group and the methacryloyl group are compounds having two or more, more preferably trifunctional or more in one molecule.
- bifunctional (meth) acrylate examples include ethylene glycol (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, Examples include tetraethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, bisphenoxyethanol full orange acrylate, and bisphenoxyethanol full orange acrylate.
- Examples of the tri- or more functional (meth) acrylate include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, tri ((meth) acryloyloxyethyl) phosphate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate. , Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, and the like.
- Preferable commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK ester series manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., bifunctional A-200, A-400, A-600, A-1000, ABE-300, A- BPE-4, A-BPE-10, A-BPE-20, A-BPE-30, A-BPP-3, A-DOD, A-DCP, A-IBD-2E, A-NPG, 701A, A- B1206PE, A-HD-N, A-NOD-N, APG-100, APG-200, APG-400, APG-700, 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G, 9G, 14G, 23G, BG, BD, HD- N, NOD, IND, BPE-100, BPE-200, BPE-300, BPE-500, BPE-900, BPE-1300N, NPG, DCP, 1206PE, 701, 3 G, 9PG, tri
- the photosensitive resin composition of this invention may use the compound containing an oxetane group as crosslinking agents other than (D) crosslinking agent with (D) crosslinking agent. It is preferable that there are two or more oxetane groups in the molecule.
- Examples of the compound having two or more oxetanyl groups in the molecule include the compounds described in paragraphs 0134 to 0145 of JP-A-2008-224970, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- Aron Oxetane OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, and PNOX (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be used.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain a compound in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group (also referred to as “(E) compound”).
- the compound in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is a compound in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group, and the protecting group is eliminated by the action of an acid to increase alkali solubility.
- the compound (E) plays a role of decreasing the alkali solubility in the non-exposed area and increasing the alkali solubility in the exposed area.
- As the acid group a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
- the acid-decomposable group is not particularly limited as long as it is a group that can be decomposed by the action of an acid.
- An acetal group, a ketal group, a silyl group, and a silyl ether group can be mentioned, and an acetal group is preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity.
- Specific examples of the protecting group include tert-butoxycarbonyl group, isopropoxycarbonyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, tetrahydrofuranyl group, ethoxyethyl group, methoxyethyl group, ethoxymethyl group, trimethylsilyl group, tert-butoxycarbonylmethyl group, And trimethylsilyl ether group. From the viewpoints of sensitivity and stability, an ethoxyethyl group and a tetrahydrofuranyl group are preferred.
- the compound (E) may be a polymer (for example, more than 5000 or even more than 10,000) or a low molecule (for example, 5000 or less). More preferred.
- the molecular weight is a number average molecular weight determined by polystyrene conversion.
- 150 or more are preferred and 300 or more are more preferred.
- a compound (E) contains either an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an alicyclic structure from a viewpoint of a dissolution inhibitory ability improvement.
- the compound (E) preferably has two or more acid groups protected in the molecule from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity. Moreover, it is preferable that a (E) compound contains an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring from a viewpoint of compatibility improvement with (A) component.
- a (E) compound contains an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring from a viewpoint of compatibility improvement with (A) component.
- the compound (E) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (E-1-1).
- Formula (E-1-1) (In the general formula (E-1-1), R represents a monovalent to hexavalent organic group having a molecular weight of 2000 or less, and R 1 and R 2 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. , R 1 and R 2 are an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and may combine with R 1 or R 2 to form a cyclic ether.
- N1 represents an integer of 1 to 6.
- R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is more preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
- the alkyl group may have a substituent.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably a linear alkyl group.
- alkyl group examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a t-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.
- aryl group an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is further preferable.
- the aryl group may have a substituent.
- a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group etc. are mentioned, for example, A phenyl group is especially preferable.
- R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and may combine with R 1 or R 2 to form a cyclic ether.
- the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and further an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. preferable.
- the alkyl group examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, a t-butyl group, a pentyl group, a neopentyl group, and a hexyl group.
- the aryl group an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is further preferable.
- Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, a mesityl group, and a naphthyl group.
- R 3 may be linked to R 1 or R 2 to form a cyclic ether.
- the cyclic ether formed by linking to R 1 or R 2 is preferably a 3- to 6-membered cyclic ether, more preferably a 5- to 6-membered cyclic ether.
- R 1 and R 2 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- R 3 is preferably bonded to an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R 1 or R 2 to form a tetrahydrofuranyl group.
- R 1 to R 3 may have a substituent.
- substituents include an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms and a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom), and these substituents may further have a substituent.
- R represents a monovalent to hexavalent organic group having a molecular weight of 2000 or less.
- the organic group represented by R is a 1 to 6 valent organic group having a molecular weight of 2000 or less, preferably a 1 to 6 valent organic group having a molecular weight of 1500 or less, and a 1 to 6 valent organic group having a molecular weight of 1000 or less. More preferred.
- the organic group represented by R is preferably an organic group containing an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring and containing no atoms other than C, H, O, and N atoms, and is an organic group containing a cyclic structure and / or a carbonyl group.
- a group composed of a combination of an aromatic group, a cycloaliphatic group, a carbonyl group, an alkylene group, a phenylene group, and an oxygen atom is more preferable.
- R is preferably the following organic group when the acid group is a phenolic hydroxy group.
- a wavy line represents a bonding site with an oxygen atom
- R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms
- m and n each independently represents 0 to 4 Represents an integer.
- R is preferably the following organic group when the acid group is a carboxy group.
- a wavy line represents a bonding site with an oxygen atom
- R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms).
- M and n each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4 (preferably 0).
- the compound (E) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (E-1-2).
- Formula (E-1-2) (In general formula (E-1-2), R 1 represents an n1-valent organic group, Ar represents an optionally substituted aryl group, a represents an integer of 0 or more, and n1 represents 2) (An integer greater than or equal to 1 is shown, where n1-a is an integer greater than or equal to 1.)
- R 1 represents an n1-valent organic group, preferably a 2- to 8-valent organic group, more preferably a 2- to 6-valent organic group.
- R 1 is preferably a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 15 carbon atoms, or a group mainly having a hydrocarbon group in which 1 to 2 oxygen atoms form an ether bond in the hydrocarbon group.
- R 1 represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon structure (for example, a linear alkylene structure, a branched alkylene structure, a cycloalkylene structure, a norbornane structure, a norbornene structure, a norbornane skeleton, or a structure in which a norbornene skeleton and a cycloalkylene skeleton are condensed).
- Aromatic hydrocarbon structures eg, benzene structures
- aralkyl structures structures in which these structures are combined
- structures in which these structures are combined through ether bonds and other tetrahydropyran structures
- R 1 an alkylene structure, an alicyclic structure, an ether structure, an aralkyl structure, or a combination of these is particularly preferable as a basic skeleton.
- Ar represents an optionally substituted aryl group.
- aryl group an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is further preferable.
- Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, a mesityl group, and a naphthyl group.
- a represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, and more preferably 0.
- n represents an integer of 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 8, more preferably an integer of 2 to 6, and more preferably 2.
- Na is an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1-7.
- Ar represents an optionally substituted aryl group, and specific examples thereof include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom; a methyl group, a tert-butyl group and the like.
- Preferred examples include alkyl groups; alkoxy groups such as methoxy groups.
- the compound represented by the general formula (E-1-2) preferably contains no atoms other than C, H, O, and N atoms from the viewpoint of improving compatibility with the component (A).
- the compound (E) is preferably a compound having a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (E-1-3).
- General formula (E-1-3) (In the general formula (E-1-3), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and may combine with R 1 or R 2 to form a cyclic ether, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents 2 Represents a valent organic group.
- R 1 and R 2 has the same meaning as R 1 and R 2 in the general formula (E-1-1), and preferred ranges are also the same.
- R 3 has the same meaning as R 3 in formula (E-1-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
- X represents a divalent organic group.
- Examples of the divalent organic group represented by X include a phenylene group, a carbonyl group, and a p-phenylenecarbonyl group.
- Preferable specific examples of the compound having a repeating unit represented by the general formula (E-1-3) include a polymer having any one of the following structural units.
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- the weight average molecular weight of the compound having a repeating unit represented by the general formula (E-1-3) is preferably 2000 to 50000, more preferably 3000 to 20000.
- the weight average molecular weight is defined by a polystyrene conversion value of gel permeation chromatography.
- the other component is preferably a compound having a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (E-1-4).
- General formula (E-1-4) (In the general formula (E-1-4), R 41 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X represents a single bond or a divalent organic group, and R 42 may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group or a hydroxyl group.)
- X represents a single bond or a divalent organic group
- examples of the divalent organic group represented by X include a phenylene group, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, and a p-phenylenecarbonyl group.
- R 42 represents an aryl group which may have a substituent or a hydroxyl group
- the aryl group which may have a substituent includes an aryl represented by R 1 in formula (E-1-1) It is synonymous with group, and its preferable range is also the same.
- the aryl group may have a substituent.
- the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom), a hydroxyl group, and the like, and these substituents may further have a substituent. Good.
- Preferable specific examples of the compound having a repeating unit represented by the general formula (E-1-4) include a polymer having any one of the following structural units.
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- the compounds (1) to (3) are preferably used from the viewpoint of compatibility with the component (A). From the viewpoint, it is preferable to use the compounds (4) to (5) having an acid group.
- the content of the compound (E) is 5 to 50 parts by mass, and more preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the (A) polybenzoxazole precursor.
- the content is 5 to 50 parts by mass, film physical properties and sensitivity can be improved.
- 2 or more types of (E) compounds can be used, and when using 2 or more types, the total amount becomes the said range.
- (E) compound can also be made into 1 mass% or less of the total solid of the composition of this invention.
- an adhesion improver alkoxysilane compound
- a sensitizer a basic compound
- a surfactant preferably added as necessary.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention includes an acid proliferation agent, a development accelerator, a plasticizer, a thermal radical generator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, and an organic or inorganic precipitation inhibitor.
- Known additives such as can be added.
- compounds described in paragraph numbers 0201 to 0224 of JP2012-8859A can be used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain an alkoxysilane compound as an adhesion improving agent.
- an alkoxysilane compound is used, the adhesion between the film formed from the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention and the substrate can be improved, or the properties of the film formed from the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention can be adjusted. Can do.
- the alkoxysilane compound that can be used in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is a base material, for example, a silicon compound such as silicon, silicon oxide, or silicon nitride, or a metal such as gold, copper, molybdenum, titanium, or aluminum.
- the compound improves the adhesion between the insulating film and the insulating film.
- silane coupling agents include ⁇ -glycid such as ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, and ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane.
- ⁇ -methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane such as xylpropyltrialkoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyl dialkoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, ⁇ -methacryloxypropyl dialkoxysilane, ⁇ -chloropropyltrialkoxy Examples thereof include silane, ⁇ -mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, ⁇ - (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, and vinyltrialkoxysilane.
- ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and ⁇ -methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is more preferable. Further preferred. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- an alkoxysilane compound A well-known thing can be used for an alkoxysilane compound, without specifically limiting to these.
- the content of the alkoxysilane compound is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. 0.5 to 20 parts by mass is more preferable.
- An alkoxysilane compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When using 2 or more types of alkoxysilane compounds, the total amount becomes the said range.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a sensitizer in order to promote the decomposition in combination with the photoacid generator.
- the sensitizer absorbs actinic rays and enters an electronically excited state.
- the sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur.
- a photo-acid generator raise
- Examples of preferred sensitizers include compounds belonging to the following compounds and having an absorption wavelength in any of the wavelength ranges from 350 nm to 450 nm.
- Polynuclear aromatics eg, pyrene, perylene, triphenylene, anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-diethoxyanthracene, 3,7-dimethoxyanthracene, 9,10-dipropyloxyanthracene
- xanthenes Eg, fluorescein, eosin, erythrosine, rhodamine B, rose bengal
- xanthones eg, xanthone, thioxanthone, dimethylthioxanthone, diethylthioxanthone
- cyanines eg, thiacarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine
- merocyanines For example, merocyanine, carbomerocyanine), rhodocyanines, oxonols, thiazines (eg, thionine, methylene blue, to
- polynuclear aromatics polynuclear aromatics, acridones, styryls, base styryls, and coumarins are preferable, and polynuclear aromatics are more preferable.
- polynuclear aromatics anthracene derivatives are most preferred.
- the content of the sensitizer is 0.001 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid components in the photosensitive resin composition. It is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 20 parts by mass. Two or more sensitizers can be used in combination. When two or more kinds of sensitizers are used, the total amount is within the above range.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain a basic compound.
- the basic compound can be arbitrarily selected from those used in chemically amplified resists. Examples include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids, and the like. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0204 to 0207 of JP2011-221494A and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0141 to 0145 of JP2012-133301A. It is incorporated herein.
- aliphatic amine examples include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, and the like.
- examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
- aromatic amine examples include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine and the like.
- heterocyclic amine examples include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, N-cyclohexyl-N ′-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0 ] -5-Nonene, 1,8-di And azabicyclo
- Examples of the quaternary ammonium hydroxide include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-hexylammonium hydroxide, and the like.
- Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate and the like.
- the basic compounds that can be used in the present invention may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
- the content of the basic compound is 0.001 to 3 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid component in the photosensitive resin composition.
- the amount is preferably 0.005 to 1 part by mass.
- the total amount becomes the said range.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant.
- a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic, or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
- examples of the surfactant used in the composition of the present invention include those described in paragraph Nos. 0201 to 0205 in JP2012-88459A, and paragraphs 0185 to 0188 in JP2011-215580A. Can be used and these descriptions are incorporated herein.
- nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. .
- the following trade names are KP-341, X-22-822 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow No.
- the surfactant is measured by gel permeation chromatography using the structural unit A and the structural unit B represented by the following general formula (I-1-1) and using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent.
- a preferred example is a copolymer having a polystyrene-reduced weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
- R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
- R 404 represents hydrogen.
- L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms
- p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio
- p is 10 mass% to 80 mass%.
- the following numerical values are represented, q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass, r represents an integer of 1 to 18, and s represents an integer of 1 to 10.
- L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following general formula (I-1-2).
- R 405 in formula (I-1-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability with respect to the coated surface. And an alkyl group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms is more preferred.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably from 1,500 to 5,000.
- These surfactants can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
- the content of the surfactant is preferably 10 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid components in the photosensitive resin composition. 0.001 to 10 parts by mass is more preferable, and 0.01 to 3 parts by mass is even more preferable.
- Surfactant may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When using 2 or more types of surfactant, the total amount becomes the said range.
- an acid proliferating agent can be used for the purpose of improving sensitivity.
- the acid proliferating agent that can be used in the present invention is a compound that can further generate an acid by an acid-catalyzed reaction to increase the acid concentration in the reaction system, and is a compound that exists stably in the absence of an acid. is there.
- Specific examples of such an acid proliferating agent include the acid proliferating agents described in paragraph numbers 0226 to 0228 of JP2011-221494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- the content of the acid proliferating agent in the photosensitive composition should be 10 to 1,000 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the photoacid generator. From the viewpoint of dissolution contrast between the exposed part and the unexposed part, it is preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass.
- the acid proliferating agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds of acid proliferating agents are used, the total amount is within the above range.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention can contain a development accelerator.
- a development accelerator those described in paragraphs 0171 to 0172 of JP2012-042837A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
- a development accelerator may be used individually by 1 type, and can also use 2 or more types together.
- the content of the development accelerator is 0 with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and residual film ratio. Is preferably 30 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, and most preferably 0.5 to 10 parts by mass.
- the total amount is within the above range.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant.
- an antioxidant a well-known antioxidant can be contained. By containing the antioxidant, there is an advantage that coloring of the cured film can be prevented, or the film thickness reduction due to decomposition by light or heat can be reduced, and the heat-resistant transparency is excellent.
- the antioxidant include phosphorus antioxidants, amides, hydrazides, sulfur antioxidants, phenolic antioxidants, ascorbic acids, zinc sulfate, saccharides, nitrites, sulfites, thiosulfates, Examples include hydroxylamine derivatives.
- a phenolic antioxidant, a phosphorus antioxidant, and a sulfur antioxidant are preferable, and a phenolic antioxidant is more preferable from the viewpoints of coloring the cured film by light and heat and reducing the film thickness.
- These may be used individually by 1 type and may mix 2 or more types.
- the combined use of a phenol-based antioxidant and a sulfur-based antioxidant is preferable.
- Preferred commercial products include ADK STAB AO-15, ADK STAB AO-18, ADK STAB AO-20, ADK STAB AO-23, ADK STAB AO-30, ADK STAB AO-37, ADK STAB AO-40, ADK STAB AO-50, ADK STAB AO-51, ADK STAB AO-60, ADK STAB AO-70, ADK STAB AO-330, ADK STAB AO-412S, ADK STAB AO-503, ADK STAB PEP-4C, ADK STAB PEP-8, ADK STAB PEP-8W, ADK STAB PEP-24G, ADK STAB PEP-36, Examples include ADK STAB PEP-36Z and ADK STAB HP-10 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
- the content of the antioxidant is 0.1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid components of the photosensitive resin composition.
- the amount is preferably 0.2 to 5 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.5 to 4 parts by mass.
- the total amount becomes the said range.
- thermal radical generators described in paragraphs 0120 to 0121 of JP2012-8223A, nitrogen-containing compounds and thermal acid generators described in WO2011-133604A1 can be used. Is incorporated herein by reference.
- a resin composition can be prepared by preparing a solution in which components are dissolved in a solvent in advance and then mixing them in a predetermined ratio.
- the composition solution prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m or the like.
- the solid content concentration of the composition of the present invention at 25 ° C. is preferably 1 to 60% by mass, more preferably 3 to 40% by mass, further preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 5 to 17% by mass.
- the viscosity at 25 ° C. of the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 100 mPa ⁇ s, more preferably 2 to 60 mPa ⁇ s, and most preferably 3 to 40 mPa ⁇ s.
- the viscosity can be measured, for example, using a viscometer RE85L (rotor: 1 ° 34 ′ ⁇ R24 measurement range 0.6 to 1200 mPa ⁇ s) manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd., with the temperature adjusted to 25 ° C. .
- the method for producing a cured film of the present invention preferably includes the following steps (1) to (5).
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is preferably applied onto a substrate to form a wet film containing a solvent.
- substrate cleaning such as alkali cleaning or plasma cleaning
- the method for treating the substrate surface with hexamethyldisilazane is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method in which the substrate is exposed to hexamethyldisilazane vapor.
- the substrate include inorganic substrates, resins, and resin composite materials.
- the inorganic substrate examples include glass, quartz, silicone, silicon nitride, and a composite substrate in which molybdenum, titanium, aluminum, copper, or the like is vapor-deposited on such a substrate.
- the resins include polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene naphthalate, polystyrene, polycarbonate, polysulfone, polyethersulfone, polyarylate, allyl diglycol carbonate, polyamide, polyimide, polyamideimide, polyetherimide, poly Fluorine resins such as benzazole, polyphenylene sulfide, polycycloolefin, norbornene resin, polychlorotrifluoroethylene, liquid crystal polymer, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, silicone resin, ionomer resin, cyanate resin, crosslinked fumaric acid diester, cyclic polyolefin, aromatic Made of synthetic resin such as aromatic ether, maleimide
- the photosensitive resin composition can be applied onto the substrate by a known coating method such as slit coating, spin coating, or inkjet coating. Of these, slit coating is preferred. Since the slit coat can be efficiently applied to a large substrate, the productivity is high. And large-sized substrate refers to a substrate area of 300000Mm 2 more 12000000Mm 2 or less.
- the relative movement speed of the substrate and the slit die is preferably 20 to 180 mm / sec. It is also possible to combine spin coating after slit coating.
- the coating film thickness (dry film thickness) is not particularly limited, and can be applied with a film thickness according to the application, but is usually used in the range of 0.5 to 10 ⁇ m.
- the solvent removal step (2) the solvent is removed from the applied film by vacuum (vacuum) and / or heating to form a dry coating film on the substrate.
- the heating conditions for the solvent removal step are preferably 70 to 130 ° C. and about 30 to 300 seconds. When the temperature and time are in the above ranges, the pattern adhesiveness is better and the residue tends to be further reduced.
- the substrate provided with the coating film is irradiated with an actinic ray having a predetermined pattern.
- the photoacid generator is decomposed to generate an acid. Due to the catalytic action of the generated acid, the acid-decomposable group contained in the coating film component is hydrolyzed to generate a carboxyl group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
- a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh-pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, an LED light source, an excimer laser generator, and the like can be used, and i-line (365 nm), h-line (405 nm), Actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm to 450 nm, such as 436 nm), can be preferably used.
- irradiation light can also be adjusted through spectral filters, such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a band pass filter, as needed.
- the exposure amount is preferably 1 to 500 mJ / cm 2 .
- various types of exposure machines such as a mirror projection aligner, a stepper, a scanner, a proximity, a contact, a microlens array, a lens scanner, laser exposure, and immersion exposure can be used.
- the super-resolution technique includes multiple exposure in which exposure is performed a plurality of times, a method using a phase shift mask, and an annular illumination method. By using these super-resolution techniques, it is possible to form a higher definition pattern, which is preferable.
- PEB Post Exposure Bake
- the temperature for performing PEB is preferably 30 ° C. or higher and 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 40 ° C. or higher and 110 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 50 ° C. or higher and 100 ° C. or lower.
- a copolymer having a liberated carboxyl group or phenolic hydroxyl group is developed using an alkaline developer.
- a positive image is formed by removing an exposed area containing a resin composition having a carboxyl group or a phenolic hydroxyl group that is easily dissolved in an alkaline developer.
- the developer used in the development step preferably contains an aqueous solution of a basic compound.
- Examples of basic compounds include alkali metal hydroxides such as lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, and potassium hydroxide; alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, and cesium carbonate; sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate Alkali metal bicarbonates such as: tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, diethyldimethylammonium hydroxide, and other tetraalkylammonium hydroxides: Alkyl) trialkylammonium hydroxides; silicates such as sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate; ethylamine, propylamine, diethylamine, triethylammonium Alkylamines such as diamine; alcohol amines such as dimethylethanolamine and triethanolamine; 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-und
- sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, and choline (2-hydroxyethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide) are preferable.
- An aqueous solution obtained by adding an appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol or ethanol or a surfactant to the alkaline aqueous solution can also be used as a developer.
- the pH of the developer is preferably 10.0 to 14.0.
- the development time is preferably 30 to 500 seconds, and the development method may be any of a liquid piling method (paddle method), a shower method, a dipping method, and the like.
- a rinsing step can also be performed after development. In the rinsing step, the developed substrate and the development residue are removed by washing the developed substrate with pure water or the like.
- a known method can be used as the rinsing method. For example, shower rinse and dip rinse can be mentioned.
- the obtained positive image is heated to thermally decompose the acid-decomposable group to generate a carboxyl group or a phenolic hydroxyl group, to crosslink the crosslinkable group, the crosslinking agent, and the like.
- a cured film can be formed by promoting cyclized PBO. This heating is performed using a heating device such as a hot plate or an oven at a predetermined temperature, for example, 180 to 400 ° C. for a predetermined time, for example, 5 to 120 minutes on a hot plate, 30 to 360 minutes for an oven.
- a protective film and an interlayer insulating film that are superior in heat resistance, hardness and the like can be formed.
- the transparency can be further improved.
- post-baking can be performed after baking at a relatively low temperature (addition of a middle baking process).
- middle baking it is preferable to post-bake at a high temperature of 200 ° C. or higher after heating at 90 to 150 ° C. for 1 to 60 minutes.
- middle baking and post-baking can be heated in three or more stages. The taper angle of the pattern can be adjusted by devising such middle baking and post baking.
- heating methods can use well-known heating methods, such as a hotplate, oven, and an infrared heater.
- post-exposure the entire surface of the patterned substrate was re-exposed with actinic rays (post-exposure), and then post-baked to generate an acid from the photoacid generator present in the unexposed portion, thereby performing a crosslinking step. It can function as a catalyst to promote, and can accelerate the curing reaction of the film.
- the preferred exposure amount in the case of including a post-exposure step preferably 100 ⁇ 3,000mJ / cm 2, particularly preferably 100 ⁇ 500mJ / cm 2.
- the cured film obtained from the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention can also be used as an etching resist.
- dry etching processes such as ashing, plasma etching, and ozone etching can be performed as the etching process.
- the cured film of the present invention is a cured film obtained by curing the above-described photosensitive resin composition.
- the cured film of the present invention can be suitably used as an interlayer insulating film.
- the cured film of this invention is a cured film obtained by the formation method of the cured film of this invention mentioned above.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention With the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, an interlayer insulating film having excellent insulation and high transparency even when baked at high temperatures can be obtained. Since the interlayer insulating film using the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention has high transparency and excellent cured film properties, it is useful for liquid crystal display devices and organic EL display devices.
- the transmittance of the cured film of the present invention at a wavelength of 400 nm is preferably 85 to 100%, more preferably 90 to 100%, and still more preferably 95 to 100%.
- the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm can be measured, for example, with a spectrophotometer (U-3000: manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.).
- the liquid crystal display device of the present invention comprises the cured film of the present invention.
- the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not particularly limited except that it has a protective film, a planarizing film, and an interlayer insulating film formed using the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, and is known in various structures.
- the liquid crystal display device can be mentioned.
- specific examples of TFT (Thin-Film Transistor) included in the liquid crystal display device of the present invention include amorphous silicon-TFT, low-temperature polysilicon-TFT, oxide semiconductor TFT, and the like. Since the cured film of the present invention is excellent in electrical characteristics, it can be preferably used in combination with these TFTs.
- the liquid crystal driving method that can be adopted by the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, a TN (Twisted Nematic) method, a VA (Virtual Alignment) method, an IPS (In-Place-Switching) method, an FFS (Frings Field Switching) method, an OCB (Optical) method. Compensated Bend) method and the like.
- the cured film of the present invention can also be used in a COA (Color Filter on Array) type liquid crystal display device.
- the organic insulating film (115) of JP-A-2005-284291, -346054 can be used as the organic insulating film (212).
- the alignment method of the liquid crystal alignment film that the liquid crystal display device of the present invention can take include a rubbing alignment method and a photo alignment method.
- the polymer orientation may be supported by a PSA (Polymer Sustained Alignment) technique described in JP-A Nos. 2003-149647 and 2011-257734.
- the photosensitive resin composition of this invention and the cured film of this invention are not limited to the said use, It can be used for various uses. For example, it can be suitably used for a color filter protective film, a spacer for keeping the thickness of a liquid crystal layer in a liquid crystal display device constant, a microlens provided on a color filter in a solid-state imaging device, or the like.
- the color liquid crystal display device 10 is a liquid crystal panel having a backlight unit 12 on the back surface, and the liquid crystal panel includes all pixels disposed between two glass substrates 14 and 15 having a polarizing film attached thereto.
- the elements of the TFT 16 corresponding to are arranged.
- Each element formed on the glass substrate is wired with an ITO transparent electrode 19 that forms a pixel electrode through a contact hole 18 formed in the cured film 17.
- an RGB color filter 22 in which a liquid crystal 20 layer and a black matrix are arranged is provided.
- the light source of the backlight is not particularly limited, and a known light source can be used.
- the liquid crystal display device can be a 3D (stereoscopic) type or a touch panel type. Further, it can be made flexible, and used as the second interlayer insulating film (48) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-145686 and the interlayer insulating film (520) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-258758. Can do. Further, even in a static drive type liquid crystal display device, a pattern with high designability can be displayed by applying the present invention. As an example, the present invention can be applied as an insulating film of a polymer network type liquid crystal as described in JP-A-2001-125086.
- the organic EL display device of the present invention includes the cured film of the present invention.
- the organic EL display device of the present invention is not particularly limited except that it has a flattening film and an interlayer insulating film formed using the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, and various known structures having various structures. Examples thereof include an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
- specific examples of TFT (Thin-Film Transistor) included in the organic EL display device of the present invention include amorphous silicon-TFT, low-temperature polysilicon-TFT, oxide semiconductor TFT, and the like. Since the cured film of the present invention is excellent in electrical characteristics, it can be preferably used in combination with these TFTs.
- FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram of an example of an organic EL display device.
- a schematic cross-sectional view of a substrate in a bottom emission type organic EL display device is shown, and a planarizing film 4 is provided.
- a bottom gate type TFT 1 is formed on a glass substrate 6, and an insulating film 3 made of Si 3 N 4 is formed so as to cover the TFT 1.
- a contact hole (not shown) is formed in the insulating film 3, and then a wiring 2 (height: 1.0 ⁇ m) connected to the TFT 1 through the contact hole is formed on the insulating film 3.
- the wiring 2 is for connecting the TFT 1 with an organic EL element formed between the TFTs 1 or in a later process.
- the flattening layer 4 is formed on the insulating film 3 in a state where the unevenness due to the wiring 2 is embedded.
- a bottom emission type organic EL element is formed on the planarizing film 4. That is, the first electrode 5 made of ITO is formed on the planarizing film 4 so as to be connected to the wiring 2 through the contact hole 7.
- the first electrode 5 corresponds to the anode of the organic EL element.
- An insulating film 8 having a shape covering the periphery of the first electrode 5 is formed. By providing the insulating film 8, a short circuit between the first electrode 5 and the second electrode formed in the subsequent process is prevented. can do. Further, although not shown in FIG.
- a hole transport layer, an organic light emitting layer, and an electron transport layer are sequentially deposited through a desired pattern mask, and then a second layer made of Al is formed on the entire surface above the substrate.
- An active matrix organic material in which two electrodes are formed and sealed by bonding using a sealing glass plate and an ultraviolet curable epoxy resin, and each organic EL element is connected to a TFT 1 for driving it.
- An EL display device is obtained.
- a resist pattern formed using the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention as a structural member of a MEMS device can be used as a partition wall or mechanically driven. Used as part of the part.
- MEMS devices include parts such as SAW filters, BAW filters, gyro sensors, display micro shutters, image sensors, electronic paper, inkjet heads, biochips, sealants, and the like. More specific examples are exemplified in JP-T-2007-522531, JP-A-2008-250200, JP-A-2009-263544, and the like.
- the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is excellent in flatness and transparency, for example, the bank layer (16) and the planarization film (57) described in FIG. 2 of JP-A-2011-107476, JP-A-2010-
- spacers for maintaining the thickness of the liquid crystal layer in liquid crystal display devices imaging optical systems for on-chip color filters such as facsimiles, electronic copying machines, solid-state image sensors, and micro lenses for optical fiber connectors are also used. It can be used suitably.
- Synthesis Example A-1 Synthesis of Resin A-1 In a three-necked flask equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, and a nitrogen introduction tube, 293 g (0.8 mol) of hexafluoro-2,2-bis (3-amino- 4-Hydroxyphenyl) propane (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), 158.2 g (2.0 mol) of pyridine and 1.2 kg of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) were added. This was stirred at room temperature and then cooled to ⁇ 25 ° C. with a dry ice / acetone bath. To this solution, while maintaining the reaction temperature at ⁇ 20 ° C.
- Synthesis Examples A-2 to A-14 Synthesis of Resins A-2 to 14 Resins A-2 to A-14 were synthesized in the same manner as Resin A-1.
- the apparatus used in these syntheses, the amount of pyridine, the amount of solvent, the method for taking out the polymer, etc. are all the same apparatus and conditions as in Synthesis Example A-1.
- all of the acid dichloride was mixed and placed on the dropping liquid side.
- the amount of monomer used and the molecular weight of the resulting polymer are shown in the table below.
- bis-APAF represents hexafluoro-2,2-bis (3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl) propane
- ODC represents 4,4′-oxybisbenzoyl chloride
- IC represents isophthalic acid chloride.
- Seb-C represents sebacic acid dichloride (manufactured by ALDRICH)
- Adi-C represents adipic acid dichloride (manufactured by ALDRICH)
- CHD-C represents 1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid dichloride (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry 1, 4-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid obtained by acidification by a conventional method)
- AcCl represents acetyl chloride (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
- a molecular weight (GPC) represents the numerical value x1000 in a table
- the molecular weight is an Mw value measured by gel permeation chromatography in terms of polystyrene, and represents a numerical value x 1000 in the table (hereinafter the same as the molecular weight of the resin).
- Synthesis Example A-101a Synthesis of Resin A-101a
- 150 g of the polymer (A-1) obtained in Synthesis Example A-1 and propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate (PGMEA) 2.4 L was added, and the contents were concentrated to 1.35 kg.
- PGMEA propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate
- 17.4 g (2.25 mmol) of camphorsulfonic acid (3 mass% PGMEA solution) and 12.99 g (0.169 mol) of 2,3-dihydrofuran were added, Stir at room temperature for 4 hours.
- Synthesis Examples A-101b to A-114c Synthesis of Resins A-101b to A-114c Resins A-101b to A-114c were synthesized in the same manner as Resin A-101a.
- the equipment used in these syntheses, the amount of solvent, the method of taking out the polymer, etc. are all the same equipment and conditions as in Synthesis Example A-101a.
- the amount of monomer used and the molecular weight of the resulting polymer are shown in the table below.
- DHF 2,3-dihydrofuran
- CSA camphorsulfonic acid
- NEt 3 triethylamine (10% by mass PGMEA solution).
- Synthesis Example A-201a Synthesis of Resin A-201a Synthesis Example A-101a except that 12.99 g of 2,3-dihydrofuran in Synthesis Example A-101a was changed to 12.19 g (0.169 mol) of ethyl vinyl ether. The reaction, polymer reprecipitation, and drying were performed in the same manner as described above. The polymer obtained at this time had an OH group protection rate of 30% and a molecular weight of 6,700.
- Synthesis Example A-301a Synthesis of Resin A-301a Synthesis Example A-101a except that 12.99 g of 2,3-dihydrofuran in Synthesis Example A-101a was changed to 21.3 g (0.169 mol) of cyclohexyl vinyl ether. The reaction, polymer reprecipitation, and drying were performed in the same manner as described above. The polymer obtained at this time had an OH group protection rate of 30% and a molecular weight of 6,800.
- Photoacid generator B-1 structure shown below (PAG-103, manufactured by BASF), pKa of generated acid is 2 or less
- Ts represents a tosyl group.
- the pKa of the acid generated is 2 or less
- B-7 Structure shown below (GSID-26-1, triarylsulfonium salt, manufactured by BASF). The pKa of the acid generated is 2 or less
- NQD Structure shown below (synthesized according to Example 2 of JP 2000-39714 A). The acid generated has a pKa greater than 4.
- Solvent GBL Gamma butyrolactone (Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation)
- PGMEA Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (Showa Denko)
- Crosslinking agent D-1 Structure shown below (JER828, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Corporation)
- D-8 Structure shown below (Duranate 17B-60P, manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals)
- Adhesion improver E-1 ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane
- E-2 ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane
- Crude B-1-2A was purified by silica gel column chromatography to obtain 1.7 g of intermediate B-1-2A.
- B-1-2A (1.7 g) and p-xylene (6 mL) were mixed, 0.23 g of p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added and heated at 140 ° C. for 2 hours. .
- water and ethyl acetate were added to the reaction mixture and the phases were separated.
- the solution was slit-coated on a glass substrate, the solvent was volatilized by vacuum drying, and then prebaked on a hot plate at 90 ° C. for 120 seconds to form a resin layer having a thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m.
- This glass substrate was heated in an oven at 200 ° C. for 30 minutes. 0.1 mass parts of the heated film was scraped off, 10 mass parts of PGMEA was added, and GPC analysis was performed in the same manner. The case where the polymer peak detected by this analysis deviates from the retention time of the first markalinker M is A, and the case where it does not deviate is B.
- ⁇ Evaluation of sensitivity> A glass substrate (OA-10 (manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd.)) was exposed to hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) vapor for 30 seconds, and each photosensitive resin composition was slit coated, and then the solvent was volatilized by vacuum drying. Then, it prebaked on a 120 degreeC / 120 second hotplate, and formed the photosensitive resin composition layer with a film thickness of 2.0 micrometers. Next, the obtained photosensitive resin composition layer was exposed through a predetermined mask using MPA 5500CF manufactured by Canon Inc. After the exposure, the photosensitive resin composition layer heated on an 80 ° C.
- HMDS hexamethyldisilazane
- a and B are practical levels. A: Less than 100 mJ / cm 2 B: 100 mJ / cm 2 or more, less than 200 mJ / cm 2 C: 200 mJ / cm 2 or more, less than 400 mJ / cm 2 D: 400 mJ / cm 2 or more
- Example 104 The composition of Example 104 was evaluated in the same manner as the above sensitivity except that heating was not performed for 60 seconds at 80 ° C. after the pattern exposure.
- HMDS hexamethyldisilazane
- Each photosensitive resin composition was spin-coated and then pre-baked on a hot plate at 120 ° C. for 120 seconds to volatilize the solvent to form a photosensitive resin composition layer having a thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m.
- exposure is performed using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp so that the integrated irradiation amount is 300 mJ / cm 2 (energy intensity: 20 mW / cm 2 ), and then the substrate is heated in an oven at 300 ° C./60 minutes in a nitrogen atmosphere.
- a cured film was obtained.
- ⁇ Curing film adhesion> The glass substrate on which the Mo (molybdenum) thin film was formed was exposed to hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) vapor for 30 seconds. Each photosensitive resin composition was spin-coated and then pre-baked on a hot plate at 120 ° C. for 120 seconds to volatilize the solvent to form a photosensitive resin composition layer having a thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m. Subsequently, exposure is performed using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp so that the integrated irradiation amount is 300 mJ / cm 2 (energy intensity: 20 mW / cm 2 ), and then the substrate is heated in an oven at 300 ° C./60 minutes in a nitrogen atmosphere. Thus, a cured film was obtained.
- HMDS hexamethyldisilazane
- the substrate on which this cured film was formed was immersed in N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) whose temperature was controlled at 80 ° C. for 30 minutes. After immersion, the cured film was cut using a cutter at intervals of 1 mm vertically and horizontally, and a tape peeling test (100 mask loss cut method: conforming to JIS 5600) was performed using a scotch tape. The adhesion between the cured film and the substrate was evaluated from the area of the cured film transferred to the back surface of the tape. The results are shown in the following table. The smaller the numerical value, the higher the adhesion to the base substrate, and A or B is a practical level. A: The transferred area is less than 10% B: The transferred area is 10% or more and less than 50% C: The transferred area is 50% or more
- Comparative Example 4 which does not contain a photo-acid generator is remarkably inferior to an Example in a sensitivity and adhesiveness. It was found that Comparative Example 5 using a photoacid generator having a pKa of the acid generated exceeding 4 has significantly lower sensitivity, transmittance, heat resistance, and adhesion than the examples. Moreover, it turned out that the comparative example 6 which does not contain a polybenzoxazole precursor is remarkably inferior to the Example in the transmittance
- the photosensitive resin compositions of Examples 1 to 109 were subjected to pattern formation in the same manner as the sensitivity evaluation except that the exposure was changed as follows in the sensitivity evaluation. That is, a predetermined photomask was set through a 150 ⁇ m interval from the coating film, and a laser having a wavelength of 355 nm was irradiated.
- the laser device used was “AEGIS” manufactured by Buoy Technology Co., Ltd. (wavelength 355 nm, pulse width 6 nsec). In any of the examples, it was found that the pattern could be formed in the same manner as MPA5500CF.
- UV-LED exposure Further, the photosensitive resin compositions of Examples 1 to 109 were evaluated in the same manner as the sensitivity evaluation (without PEB) except that the exposure was changed to a UV-LED light source exposure machine. Similarly, it was found that pattern formation was possible.
- Example 200 An organic EL display device using a thin film transistor (TFT) was produced by the following method (see FIG. 1).
- a bottom gate type TFT 1 was formed on a glass substrate 6, and an insulating film 3 made of Si 3 N 4 was formed so as to cover the TFT 1.
- a wiring 2 (height of 1.0 ⁇ m) connected to the TFT 1 through the contact hole was formed on the insulating film 3.
- a planarizing film 4 was formed on the insulating film 3 in a state where the unevenness due to the wiring 2 was embedded.
- the planarizing film 4 is formed on the insulating film 3 by spin-coating the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 on a substrate, pre-baking on a hot plate (90 ° C. ⁇ 2 minutes), and then applying high pressure from above the mask.
- a mercury lamp is used to irradiate i-line (365 nm) with an exposure amount corresponding to the sensitivity measured by sensitivity evaluation, heated on an 80 ° C. hot plate for 60 seconds, and then developed with an aqueous alkaline solution to form a pattern.
- a heat treatment was performed at 60 ° C. for 60 minutes.
- the applicability when applying the photosensitive resin composition was good, and no wrinkles or cracks were observed in the cured film obtained after exposure, development and baking.
- the average level difference of the wiring 2 was 500 nm
- the thickness of the prepared planarizing film 4 was 2.000 nm.
- a bottom emission type organic EL element was formed on the obtained flattening film 4.
- a first electrode 5 made of ITO was formed on the planarizing film 4 so as to be connected to the wiring 2 through the contact hole 7.
- a resist was applied, prebaked, exposed through a mask having a desired pattern, and developed.
- pattern processing was performed by wet etching using an ITO etchant.
- the resist pattern was stripped at 50 ° C. using a resist stripper (remover 100, manufactured by AZ Electronic Materials).
- the first electrode 5 thus obtained corresponds to the anode of the organic EL element.
- an insulating film 8 having a shape covering the periphery of the first electrode 5 was formed.
- the insulating film 8 was formed using the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 by the same method as described above.
- a hole transport layer, an organic light emitting layer, and an electron transport layer were sequentially deposited through a desired pattern mask in a vacuum deposition apparatus.
- a second electrode made of Al was formed on the entire surface above the substrate.
- substrate was taken out from the vapor deposition machine, and it sealed by bonding together using the glass plate for sealing, and an ultraviolet curable epoxy resin.
- Example 201 An organic EL display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 200 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 46. The obtained organic EL display device showed very good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable organic EL display device.
- Example 202 An organic EL display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 200 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 91. The obtained organic EL display device showed good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable organic EL display device.
- Example 203 An organic EL display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 200 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 97. The obtained organic EL display device showed good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable organic EL display device.
- Example 204 In the active matrix type liquid crystal display device shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 of Japanese Patent No. 3312003, a cured film 17 was formed as an interlayer insulating film as follows, and a liquid crystal display device of Example 204 was obtained. That is, using the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2, the cured film 17 was formed as an interlayer insulating film by the same method as the method for forming the planarizing film 4 of the organic EL display device in Example 200.
- liquid crystal display device When a driving voltage was applied to the obtained liquid crystal display device, it was found that the liquid crystal display device showed extremely good display characteristics and had high reliability.
- Example 205 A liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 204 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 46. The obtained liquid crystal display device showed very good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable liquid crystal display device.
- Example 206 A liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 204 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 91. The obtained liquid crystal display device showed good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable liquid crystal display device.
- Example 207 A liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 204 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 97. The obtained liquid crystal display device showed good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable liquid crystal display device.
- TFT Thin Film Transistor
- Wiring 3 Insulating film 4: Flattened film 5: First electrode 6: Glass substrate 7: Contact hole 8: Insulating film 10: Liquid crystal display device 12: Backlight unit 14, 15: Glass substrate 16: TFT 17: Cured film 18: Contact hole 19: ITO transparent electrode 20: Liquid crystal 22: Color filter
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
- Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Mathematical Physics (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
- Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
- Liquid Crystal (AREA)
- Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
Abstract
Description
さらに詳しくは、液晶表示装置、有機EL(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス)表示装置、集積回路素子、固体撮像素子などの電子部品の平坦化膜、保護膜や層間絶縁膜の形成に好適な、感光性樹脂組成物およびそれを用いた硬化膜の製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a photosensitive resin composition (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “the composition of the present invention”). Moreover, it is related with the manufacturing method of the cured film using the said photosensitive resin composition, the cured film formed by hardening | curing the photosensitive resin composition, and various image display apparatuses using the said cured film.
More specifically, a photosensitive resin composition suitable for forming a flattening film, a protective film and an interlayer insulating film of an electronic component such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL (organic electroluminescence) display device, an integrated circuit element, and a solid-state imaging element. The present invention relates to an article and a method for producing a cured film using the article.
具体的には、以下の解決手段<1>により、好ましくは、<2>~<14>により、上記課題は解決された。
<1>(A)一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位を含むポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体、
(B)発生する酸のpKaが4以下である光酸発生剤、
(C)溶剤、および
(D)ベンゼン環および/またはフェノール性水酸基と反応する架橋性基を2つ以上有する架橋剤を含有する感光性樹脂組成物。
一般式(1)
<2>(D)架橋剤が有する架橋性基が、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基およびブロックイソシアネート基から選択される、<1>に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<3>(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の末端が、一般式(1-1)で表される基である、<1>または<2>に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
一般式(1-1)
<4>(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体が、m個の一般式(1-2)で表される繰り返し単位とn個の一般式(3)で表される繰り返し単位を含み、mは3~1000を表し、nは0~1000を表し、m+nは3~1000である、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
一般式(1-2)
<5>さらに密着促進剤を含有する、<1>~<4>のいずれかに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<6>(B)光酸発生剤が、オキシムスルホネート系光酸発生剤および/またはイミドスルホネート系光酸発生剤である、<1>~<5>のいずれかに記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<7>酸分解性基が、酸の作用により脱離する基、または-C(R5)2-COOR4である、<1>~<6>のいずれかに記載の感光性樹脂組成物;ただし、R5は、それぞれ独立に水素原子、または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R4は、酸の作用により脱離する基を表す。
<8>酸の作用により脱離する基が、ビニルエーテル系の置換基である、<7>に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<9>酸の作用により脱離する基が、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルコキシアルキル基、アルキルシリル基、アセタールを構成する基、またはケタールを構成する基である、<7>に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。
<10>(1)<1>~<9>のいずれかに記載の感光性樹脂組成物を基板の少なくとも一方の面に塗布する工程、
(2)塗布された感光性樹脂組成物から溶剤を除去する工程、
(3)溶剤が除去された感光性樹脂組成物を活性光線により露光する工程、
(4)露光された感光性樹脂組成物を水性現像液により現像する工程、および
(5)現像された感光性樹脂組成物を熱硬化するポストベーク工程、
を含む硬化膜の製造方法。
<11>(4)現像する工程後、(5)ポストベーク工程前に、現像された感光性樹脂組成物を全面露光する工程を含む、<10>に記載の硬化膜の製造方法。
<12><1>~<9>のいずれかに記載の感光性樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化膜または<10>または<11>に記載の方法により形成された硬化膜。
<13>層間絶縁膜である、<12>に記載の硬化膜。
<14><12>または<13>に記載の硬化膜を有する液晶表示装置または有機EL表示装置。 Under such circumstances, as a result of intensive studies by the inventor, the present invention contains a polybenzoxazole precursor having an acid-decomposable group, a photoacid generator having a pKa of 4 or less, and a predetermined crosslinking agent. As a result, it has been found that the adhesiveness to the substrate is excellent, the transmittance is high, the heat resistance is high, and the sensitivity is high, and the present invention has been completed.
Specifically, the above problem has been solved by the following means <1>, preferably <2> to <14>.
<1> (A) a polybenzoxazole precursor containing a repeating unit represented by the general formula (1),
(B) a photoacid generator in which the generated acid has a pKa of 4 or less,
(C) A photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent and (D) a crosslinking agent having two or more crosslinking groups that react with a benzene ring and / or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
General formula (1)
<2> (D) The photosensitive resin composition as described in <1> in which the crosslinkable group which a crosslinking agent has is selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group.
<3> (A) The photosensitive resin composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the terminal of the polybenzoxazole precursor is a group represented by the general formula (1-1).
General formula (1-1)
<4> (A) The polybenzoxazole precursor includes m repeating units represented by the general formula (1-2) and n repeating units represented by the general formula (3), and m is 3 The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein n represents 0 to 1000, n represents 0 to 1000, and m + n is 3 to 1000.
Formula (1-2)
<5> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, further comprising an adhesion promoter.
<6> (B) The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the photoacid generator is an oxime sulfonate photoacid generator and / or an imide sulfonate photoacid generator. .
<7> The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the acid-decomposable group is a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid, or —C (R 5 ) 2 —COOR 4 . R 5 independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 4 represents a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid.
<8> The photosensitive resin composition according to <7>, wherein the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is a vinyl ether-based substituent.
<9> The photosensitive resin composition according to <7>, wherein the group leaving by the action of an acid is an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an alkylsilyl group, a group constituting an acetal, or a group constituting a ketal. object.
<10> (1) A step of applying the photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <9> to at least one surface of a substrate,
(2) a step of removing the solvent from the applied photosensitive resin composition;
(3) A step of exposing the photosensitive resin composition from which the solvent has been removed with actinic rays,
(4) a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin composition with an aqueous developer, and (5) a post-baking step of thermosetting the developed photosensitive resin composition,
The manufacturing method of the cured film containing this.
<11> (4) The method for producing a cured film according to <10>, comprising a step of exposing the entire surface of the developed photosensitive resin composition after the step of (4) developing and before the step of (5) post-baking.
<12> A cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive resin composition according to any one of <1> to <9> or a cured film formed by the method according to <10> or <11>.
<13> The cured film according to <12>, which is an interlayer insulating film.
<14> A liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device having the cured film according to <12> or <13>.
さらに、(メタ)アクリル酸とは、アクリル酸および/またはメタクリル酸を意味する。
本発明における固形分濃度とは、25℃における固形分の濃度をいう。
本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、GPC測定によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、例えば、HLC-8220(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてTSKgel Super AWM―H(東ソー(株)製、6.0mmID×15.0cmを、溶離液として10mmol/L リチウムブロミドNMP(N-メチルピロリジノン)溶液を用いることによって求めることができる。 In addition, in the description of group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes what has a substituent with what does not have a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
Furthermore, (meth) acrylic acid means acrylic acid and / or methacrylic acid.
The solid content concentration in the present invention refers to the solid content concentration at 25 ° C.
In this specification, a weight average molecular weight and a number average molecular weight are defined as a polystyrene conversion value by GPC measurement. In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and TSKgel Super AWM-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 6) as a column. 0.0 mm ID × 15.0 cm can be determined by using a 10 mmol / L lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution as the eluent.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、(A)一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位を含むポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体、(B)発生する酸のpKaが4以下である光酸発生剤、(C)溶剤、および(D)ベンゼン環および/またはフェノール性水酸基と反応する架橋性基を2つ以上有する架橋剤を含有する。
一般式(1)
General formula (1)
本発明の組成物は、(A)一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位を含むポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体(以下、単に、「(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体」、「(A)成分」ということがある)を含有する。一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位は、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位である。本発明で用いる(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、末端に架橋性基を有していることが好ましい。末端は、片方の末端でもよいが、両方の末端に架橋性基を有していることがより好ましい。なお、本発明において、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の末端とは、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の主鎖末端を意味する。 <(A) Polybenzoxazole precursor having acid-decomposable group>
The composition of the present invention comprises (A) a polybenzoxazole precursor (hereinafter simply referred to as “(A) polybenzoxazole precursor”, “component (A)”) containing a repeating unit represented by the general formula (1). Sometimes). The repeating unit represented by the general formula (1) is a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group. The (A) polybenzoxazole precursor used in the present invention preferably has a crosslinkable group at the terminal. The terminal may be one terminal, but more preferably has a crosslinkable group at both terminals. In the present invention, the terminal of the polybenzoxazole precursor means the main chain terminal of the polybenzoxazole precursor.
本発明における、(a-1)酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位は、一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位である。本発明で用いる(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位を1種類のみ含んでいても良いし、2種類以上含んでいても良い。(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、全繰り返し単位に対して、一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位を70モル%以上含有していることが好ましく、より好ましくは80モル%以上、最も好ましくは90モル%以上である。
(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、酸分解性基を含む繰り返し単位を全繰り返し単位の50~100モル%の割合で含むことが好ましく、10~50モル%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。 << (a-1) Repeating Unit Having Acid-Decomposable Group >>
In the present invention, the repeating unit (a-1) having an acid-decomposable group is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (1). The polybenzoxazole precursor (A) used in the present invention may contain only one type of repeating unit represented by the general formula (1), or may contain two or more types. (A) The polybenzoxazole precursor preferably contains 70 mol% or more, more preferably 80 mol% or more of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (1) with respect to all repeating units. Preferably it is 90 mol% or more.
(A) The polybenzoxazole precursor preferably contains a repeating unit containing an acid-decomposable group in a proportion of 50 to 100 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol% of all repeating units.
芳香族環としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環などが挙げられる。複素環としては、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピロール環、ピロリン環、ピロリジン環、オキサゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イソチアゾール環、イミダゾール環、イミダゾリン環、イミダゾリジン環、ピラゾール環、ピラゾリン環、ピラゾリジン環、トリアゾール環、フラザン環、テトラゾール環、ピラン環、チイン環、ピリジン環、ピペリジン環、オキサジン環、モルホリン環、チアジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペラジン環およびトリアジン環などが挙げられる。脂肪族環としては、シクロペンタン環、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環などが挙げられる。
また、複数の環状構造を有する場合、環は縮環していてもよく、-O-、-S-、フッ素置換アルキレン基(好ましくは、-C(CF3)2-)、-CH2-、-SO2-、または-NHCO-などの連結基を介して複数の環状構造と結合していてもよい。連結基は、-O-、-S-、-C(CF3)2-、-CH2-、-SO2-、または-NHCO-であることが好ましく、-C(CF3)2-がより好ましい。
本発明では、X部分がフッ素置換アルキレン基を含むことが好ましい。フッ素置換アルキレン基を含むことにより、本発明の組成物の透明性がより向上する傾向にある。 X represents a tetravalent organic group. The tetravalent organic group represented by X is not particularly limited, but preferably has at least one or more cyclic structures, more preferably 1 to 2 cyclic structures. The cyclic structure may be any of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an aliphatic ring, and preferably includes an aromatic ring and / or a heterocyclic ring, and more preferably includes an aromatic ring. By setting it as such a cyclic structure, the effect of this invention is exhibited more effectively.
Examples of the aromatic ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, and an anthracene ring. As the heterocyclic ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, pyrroline ring, pyrrolidine ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, imidazoline ring, imidazolidine ring, pyrazole ring, pyrazoline ring, Examples include pyrazolidine ring, triazole ring, furazane ring, tetrazole ring, pyran ring, thiyne ring, pyridine ring, piperidine ring, oxazine ring, morpholine ring, thiazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperazine ring and triazine ring. It is done. Examples of the aliphatic ring include a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, and a cycloheptane ring.
In the case of having a plurality of cyclic structures, the ring may be condensed, —O—, —S—, a fluorine-substituted alkylene group (preferably —C (CF 3 ) 2 —), —CH 2 — , —SO 2 —, or —NHCO— may be bonded to a plurality of cyclic structures via a linking group. The linking group is preferably —O—, —S—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —SO 2 —, or —NHCO—, where —C (CF 3 ) 2 — is More preferred.
In the present invention, the X moiety preferably contains a fluorine-substituted alkylene group. By including a fluorine-substituted alkylene group, the transparency of the composition of the present invention tends to be further improved.
Xとしては、(2)、(10)が好ましく、(2)がより好ましい。特に、X1がフッ素置換アルキレン基(好ましくは、-C(CF3)2-)であると、本発明の組成物の透明性がより向上し、好ましい。 NH and R 1 bonded to X, and NH and R 2 are preferably bonded so as to be in the ortho position (adjacent position) in the cyclic structure.
X is preferably (2) or (10), more preferably (2). In particular, it is preferable that X 1 is a fluorine-substituted alkylene group (preferably —C (CF 3 ) 2 —), since the transparency of the composition of the present invention is further improved.
アルキル基は、置換基を有していても良いし、有していなくても良い。
アルキル基としては、直鎖、分枝状、環状であってもよく、直鎖、または分枝状アルキル基の場合、炭素数1~20のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~15のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~10のアルキル基がさらに好ましい。環状アルキル基の場合、炭素数3~15のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数5~15のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数5~10のアルキル基がより好ましい。具体的なアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、オクチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、ノルボルニル基、アダマンチル基などが挙げられる。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アミド基、スルホニルアミド基などを挙げることができる。 R 1 and R 2 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an acid-decomposable group, or —CORc. At least one of R 1 and R 2 is an acid-decomposable group.
The alkyl group may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and in the case of a linear or branched alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms Is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable. In the case of a cyclic alkyl group, an alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkyl group having 5 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 5 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an octyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a norbornyl group, and an adamantyl group. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amide group, and a sulfonylamide group.
R5は、それぞれ独立に水素原子、または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R4は、酸の作用により脱離する基を表す。ここで、酸の作用の酸は、通常、後述する酸発生剤から発生した酸を意味する。
酸の作用により脱離する基としては、ビニルエーテル系の置換基、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)、アルコキシアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)、アルキルシリル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20)、またはアセタール若しくはケタールを構成する基を挙げることができる。感度の観点から、アセタール基またはケタール基であることが好ましい。
アセタール若しくはケタールを構成する基としては、例えば次の構造を有するものが挙げられる。
R1xおよびR2xが表わすアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。R1xおよびR2xが表わすアリール基としては、炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。R1xおよびR2xは、それぞれ、水素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
R3Xは、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、炭素数1~16のアルキル基が好ましく、1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。アリール基としては、炭素数6~20のアリール基が好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリール基がより好ましい。 An acid-decomposable group is a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid, or a group that leaves by the action of an acid to generate an alkali-soluble group such as a hydroxyl group or a carboxyl group, such as —C (R 5 ) 2 —COOR 4. Represents.
R 5 independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 4 represents a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid. Here, the acid acting as an acid usually means an acid generated from an acid generator described later.
Examples of the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid include vinyl ether substituents, alkoxycarbonyl groups (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), alkoxyalkyl groups (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), alkylsilyl groups (preferably carbon atoms). And a group constituting an acetal or a ketal. From the viewpoint of sensitivity, an acetal group or a ketal group is preferable.
As group which comprises acetal or ketal, what has the following structure is mentioned, for example.
The alkyl group represented by R 1x and R 2x is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The aryl group represented by R 1x and R 2x is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a phenyl group. R 1x and R 2x are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
R 3X represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. As the aryl group, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
酸の作用により脱離する基として好ましい基の構造を示す。
The structure of a group preferable as a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is shown.
Rcが表わすアルキル基は、R1およびR2が表わすアルキル基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
Rcが表わすアリール基としては、炭素数6~20のアリール基が好ましく、炭素数6~14のアリール基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリール基がさらに好ましい。具体的にアリール基としては、フェニル基、トルイル基、メシチル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。アリール基が有していてもよい置換基は、アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基と同様である。 Rc represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and these groups may or may not have a substituent.
The alkyl group represented by Rc has the same meaning as the alkyl group represented by R 1 and R 2 , and the preferred range is also the same.
The aryl group represented by Rc is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, a mesityl group, and a naphthyl group. The substituent that the aryl group may have is the same as the substituent that the alkyl group may have.
アリーレン基としては、炭素数6~20のアリーレン基が好ましく、炭素数6~14のアリーレン基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリーレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的なアリーレン基としては、1,4-フェニレン基、1,3-フェニレン基、1,2-フェニレン基、ナフチレン基、アントラセニレン基などが挙げられる。
2価の環状脂肪族基としては、環状アルキレン基、環状アルケニレン基、環状アルキニレン基などが挙げられる。環状アルキレン基としては、炭素数3~20のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数3~18の環状アルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~15の環状アルキレン基がさらに好ましい。環状アルケニレン基としては、炭素数3~20のアルケニレン基が好ましく、炭素数3~18の環状アルケニレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~15の環状アルケニレン基がさらに好ましい。環状アルキニレン基としては、炭素数3~20の環状アルキニレン基が好ましく、炭素数3~18の環状アルキニレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~15の環状アルキニレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的な2価の環状脂肪族基としては、1,4-シクロヘキシレン基、1,3-シクロヘキシレン基、1,2-シクロヘキシレン基、オクチレン基などが挙げられる。
2価の複素環基としては、5員、6員または7員の複素環を有することが好ましい。5員環または6員環がさらに好ましく、6員環がより好ましい。複素環を構成するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。複素環は、芳香族性複素環であることが好ましい。芳香族性複素環は、一般に不飽和複素環であり、最多二重結合を有する不飽和複素環がさらに好ましい。具体的な複素環としては、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピロール環、ピロリン環、ピロリジン環、オキサゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イソチアゾール環、イミダゾール環、イミダゾリン環、イミダゾリジン環、ピラゾール環、ピラゾリン環、ピラゾリジン環、トリアゾール環、フラザン環、テトラゾール環、ピラン環、チイン環、ピリジン環、ピペリジン環、オキサジン環、モルホリン環、チアジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペラジン環およびトリアジン環が含まれる。
Yは、アリーレン基、2価の環状脂肪族基、2価の複素環基、または、これらと、メチレン基、酸素原子、硫黄原子、-SO2-、-CO-、-NHCO-、および-C(CF3)2-の少なくとも1種との組み合わせからなる基であってもよく、具体的には、以下の基が挙げられる。式中、Aは、メチレン基、酸素原子、硫黄原子、-SO2-、-CO-、-NHCO-、または-C(CF3)2-を表す。
As the arylene group, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an arylene group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples of the arylene group include a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,2-phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
Examples of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group include a cyclic alkylene group, a cyclic alkenylene group, and a cyclic alkynylene group. As the cyclic alkylene group, an alkylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable. The cyclic alkenylene group is preferably an alkenylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, and further preferably a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms. As the cyclic alkynylene group, a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples of the divalent cycloaliphatic group include 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,3-cyclohexylene group, 1,2-cyclohexylene group, and octylene group.
The divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered heterocyclic ring. A 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferable, and a 6-membered ring is more preferable. As the hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic ring, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable. The heterocycle is preferably an aromatic heterocycle. The aromatic heterocyclic ring is generally an unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and an unsaturated heterocyclic ring having the most double bond is more preferable. Specific heterocycles include furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, pyrroline ring, pyrrolidine ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, imidazoline ring, imidazolidine ring, pyrazole ring, Pyrazoline ring, pyrazolidine ring, triazole ring, furazane ring, tetrazole ring, pyran ring, thiyne ring, pyridine ring, piperidine ring, oxazine ring, morpholine ring, thiazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperazine ring and triazine ring Is included.
Y represents an arylene group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, a divalent heterocyclic group, or a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and — C (CF 3) 2 - in can be a group comprising a combination of at least one, and specific examples thereof include the following groups. In the formula, A represents a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, or —C (CF 3 ) 2 —.
一般式(1-2)
Formula (1-2)
アリーレン基としては、炭素数6~20のアリーレン基が好ましく、炭素数6~14のアリーレン基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリーレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的なアリーレン基としては、1,4-フェニレン基、1,3-フェニレン基、1,2-フェニレン基、ナフチレン基、アントラセニレン基などが挙げられる。
2価の複素環基としては、5員、6員または7員の複素環を有することが好ましい。5員環または6員環がさらに好ましく、6員環がより好ましい。複素環を構成するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。複素環は、芳香族性複素環であることが好ましい。芳香族性複素環は、一般に不飽和複素環である。最多二重結合を有する不飽和複素環がさらに好ましい。具体的な複素環としては、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピロール環、ピロリン環、ピロリジン環、オキサゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イソチアゾール環、イミダゾール環、イミダゾリン環、イミダゾリジン環、ピラゾール環、ピラゾリン環、ピラゾリジン環、トリアゾール環、フラザン環、テトラゾール環、ピラン環、チイン環、ピリジン環、ピペリジン環、オキサジン環、モルホリン環、チアジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペラジン環およびトリアジン環が含まれる。
2価の環状脂肪族基としては、環状アルキレン基、環状アルケニレン基、環状アルキニレン基などが挙げられる。環状アルキレン基としては、炭素数3~20の環状アルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数3~18の環状アルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~15の環状アルキレン基がさらに好ましい。環状アルケニレン基としては、炭素数3~20の環状アルケニレン基が好ましく、炭素数3~18の環状アルケニレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~15の環状アルケニレン基がさらに好ましい。環状アルキニレン基としては、炭素数3~20の環状アルキニレン基が好ましく、炭素数3~18の環状アルキニレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~15の環状アルキニレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的な2価の環状脂肪族基としては、1,4-シクロヘキシレン基、1,3-シクロヘキシレン基、1,2-シクロヘキシレン基、オクチレン基などが挙げられる。
Y1は、アリーレン基、2価の複素環基、2価の環状脂肪族基、または、これらと、メチレン基、酸素原子、硫黄原子、-SO2-、-CO-、-NHCO-、および-C(CF3)2-の少なくとも1種との組み合わせからなる基であってもよく、これらと、-C(CF3)2-との組み合わせからなる基であることがより好ましく、アリーレン基と-C(CF3)2-との組み合わせからなる基であることがさらに好ましい。
Y1としては、1,4-フェニレン基、1,3-フェニレン基、1,2-フェニレン基、オクチレン基、下記例示化合物が好ましく、1,4-フェニレン基、1,3-フェニレン基、1,2-フェニレン基、オクチレン基がより好ましい。
As the arylene group, an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an arylene group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples of the arylene group include a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,2-phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
The divalent heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered heterocyclic ring. A 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferable, and a 6-membered ring is more preferable. As the hetero atom constituting the heterocyclic ring, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are preferable. The heterocycle is preferably an aromatic heterocycle. The aromatic heterocycle is generally an unsaturated heterocycle. An unsaturated heterocyclic ring having the most double bond is more preferable. Specific heterocycles include furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, pyrroline ring, pyrrolidine ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, imidazoline ring, imidazolidine ring, pyrazole ring, Pyrazoline ring, pyrazolidine ring, triazole ring, furazane ring, tetrazole ring, pyran ring, thiyne ring, pyridine ring, piperidine ring, oxazine ring, morpholine ring, thiazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperazine ring and triazine ring Is included.
Examples of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group include a cyclic alkylene group, a cyclic alkenylene group, and a cyclic alkynylene group. As the cyclic alkylene group, a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable. As the cyclic alkenylene group, a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkenylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable. As the cyclic alkynylene group, a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a cyclic alkynylene group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples of the divalent cycloaliphatic group include 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,3-cyclohexylene group, 1,2-cyclohexylene group, and octylene group.
Y 1 represents an arylene group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, or a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and -C (CF 3) 2 - in can be a group comprising a combination of at least one of these and, -C (CF 3) 2 -, more preferably a group consisting of an arylene group And more preferably a group consisting of a combination of —C (CF 3 ) 2 —.
Y 1 is preferably a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,2-phenylene group, an octylene group, or the following exemplified compounds, and includes a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, , 2-phenylene group and octylene group are more preferable.
芳香族環としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環などが挙げられる。複素環としては、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピロール環、ピロリン環、ピロリジン環、オキサゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イソチアゾール環、イミダゾール環、イミダゾリン環、イミダゾリジン環、ピラゾール環、ピラゾリン環、ピラゾリジン環、トリアゾール環、フラザン環、テトラゾール環、ピラン環、チイン環、ピリジン環、ピペリジン環、オキサジン環、モルホリン環、チアジン環、ピリダジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジン環、ピペラジン環およびトリアジン環などが挙げられる。脂肪族環としては、シクロペンタン環、シクロヘキサン環、シクロヘプタン環などが挙げられる。
また、X1が表す4価の基が複数の環状構造を有する場合、環は縮環していてもよく、-O-、-S-、-C(CF3)2-、-CH2-、-SO2-、または-NHCO-などの連結基を介して複数の環状構造と結合していてもよい。連結基は、-O-、-S-、-C(CF3)2-、-CH2-、-SO2-、または-NHCO-であることが好ましく、-C(CF3)2-がより好ましい。 X 1 represents an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring, or these, and —CH 2 —, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO—, —NHCO—, and —C (CF 3 2 ) represents a tetravalent group consisting of a combination of at least one of-. X 1 preferably has at least one of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an aliphatic ring, and more preferably has one or two of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an aliphatic ring. preferable. X 1 preferably contains an aromatic ring and / or a heterocyclic ring, and more preferably contains an aromatic ring.
Examples of the aromatic ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, and an anthracene ring. As the heterocyclic ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrrole ring, pyrroline ring, pyrrolidine ring, oxazole ring, isoxazole ring, thiazole ring, isothiazole ring, imidazole ring, imidazoline ring, imidazolidine ring, pyrazole ring, pyrazoline ring, Examples include pyrazolidine ring, triazole ring, furazane ring, tetrazole ring, pyran ring, thiyne ring, pyridine ring, piperidine ring, oxazine ring, morpholine ring, thiazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, piperazine ring and triazine ring. It is done. Examples of the aliphatic ring include a cyclopentane ring, a cyclohexane ring, and a cycloheptane ring.
In addition, when the tetravalent group represented by X 1 has a plurality of cyclic structures, the ring may be condensed, and —O—, —S—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —CH 2 — , —SO 2 —, or —NHCO— may be bonded to a plurality of cyclic structures via a linking group. The linking group is preferably —O—, —S—, —C (CF 3 ) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —SO 2 —, or —NHCO—, where —C (CF 3 ) 2 — is More preferred.
Xとしては、(2)、(10)が好ましく、(2)がより好ましい。 NH and ORa, which are bonded to X, and NH and ORb are preferably bonded so as to be in the ortho position (adjacent position) in the cyclic structure.
X is preferably (2) or (10), more preferably (2).
酸分解性基を有するポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、(a-1)酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位の他に、その他の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。
その他の繰り返し単位としては、一般式(2)で表される繰り返し単位、一般式(3)で表される繰り返し単位、一般式(4)で表される繰り返し単位が例示される。
<<<一般式(2)で表される繰り返し単位>>>
一般式(2)
The polybenzoxazole precursor having an acid-decomposable group may contain other repeating units in addition to (a-1) the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
Examples of other repeating units include a repeating unit represented by the general formula (2), a repeating unit represented by the general formula (3), and a repeating unit represented by the general formula (4).
<<< Repeating unit represented by formula (2) >>>
General formula (2)
一般式(3)
一般式(3)中、Y1は一般式(1-2)中のY1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
一般式(3)中、X2は、アリーレン基、2価の複素環基、2価の環状脂肪族基、または、これらと、メチレン基、酸素原子、硫黄原子、-SO2-、-CO-、-NHCO-、および-C(CF3)2-の少なくとも1種との組み合わせからなる基を表し、これらの基はケイ素原子を含んでいてもよい。
X2が表わすアリーレン基、2価の複素環基、2価の環状脂肪族基は、一般式(1-2)中のY1が表わすアリーレン基、2価の複素環基、2価の環状脂肪族基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 <<< Repeating unit represented by formula (3) >>>
General formula (3)
In the general formula (3), Y 1 have the same meanings as defined in formula (1-2) Y 1 in the preferred range is also the same.
In the general formula (3), X 2 represents an arylene group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent cycloaliphatic group, or a methylene group, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, —SO 2 —, —CO -, - NHCO-, and -C (CF 3) 2 - of a group consisting of a combination of at least one, these radicals may contain a silicon atom.
An arylene group represented by X 2 , a divalent heterocyclic group, and a divalent cyclic aliphatic group are an arylene group represented by Y 1 in formula (1-2), a divalent heterocyclic group, and a divalent cyclic group. It is synonymous with an aliphatic group, and its preferable range is also the same.
一般式(4)
ここで、Y1は、一般式(1-2)におけるY1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。X3は下記で表される基であることが好ましい。
General formula (4)
Here, Y 1 has the same meaning as Y 1 in formula (1-2), and the preferred range is also the same. X 3 is preferably a group represented by the following.
炭素数1~20の直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキレン基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的には、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、イソプロピレン基、ブチレン基、t-ブチレン基などが挙げられる。
炭素数6~20のアリーレン基としては、炭素数6~14のアリーレン基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリーレン基がさらに好ましい。具体的なアリーレン基としては、1,4-フェニレン基、1,3-フェニレン基、1,2-フェニレン基、ナフチレン基、アントラセニレン基などが挙げられる。
炭素数3~20の2価の環状脂肪族基としては、炭素数3~10の2価の環状脂肪族基が好ましく、炭素数5~6の2価の環状脂肪族基がより好ましい。2価の環状脂肪族基としては、1,4-シクロヘキシレン基、1,3-シクロヘキシレン基、1,2-シクロヘキシレン基などが挙げられる。
これら炭素数1~20の直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキレン基、炭素数6~20のアリーレン基、および炭素数3~20の2価の環状脂肪族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、炭素数1~6のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アミド基、スルホニルアミド基などを挙げることができる。 The divalent organic group represented by R 5 and R 6 is not particularly limited, but may be a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and a substituent, which may have a specific substituent. Represents an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a divalent cyclic aliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a combination thereof.
As the linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, an isopropylene group, a butylene group, and a t-butylene group.
As the arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable. Specific examples of the arylene group include a 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,3-phenylene group, a 1,2-phenylene group, a naphthylene group, and an anthracenylene group.
The divalent cycloaliphatic group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms is preferably a divalent cycloaliphatic group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a divalent cycloaliphatic group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of the divalent cycloaliphatic group include a 1,4-cyclohexylene group, a 1,3-cyclohexylene group, and a 1,2-cyclohexylene group.
These linear or branched alkylene groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, arylene groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and divalent cyclic aliphatic groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amide group, and a sulfonylamide group.
置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~20の直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。具体的には、アルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、t-ブチル基などが挙げられる。
置換基を有していてもよいアリール基としては、炭素数6~20のアリール基が好ましく、炭素数6~14のアリール基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリール基がさらに好ましい。具体的にアリール基としては、フェニル基、トルイル基、メシチル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。
これら炭素数1~20の直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキル基、アリール基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、炭素数1~6のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アミド基、スルホニルアミド基などを挙げることができる。 The monovalent organic group represented by R 7 and R 8 represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. .
The linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Specifically, examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, and a t-butyl group.
The aryl group which may have a substituent is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, a mesityl group, and a naphthyl group.
These linear or branched alkyl groups and aryl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amide group, and a sulfonylamide group.
一般式(1-1)
General formula (1-1)
具体的には、R11は、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10、より好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~10、より好ましくは炭素数2~6)、アルキニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~10、より好ましくは炭素数2~6)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~20、より好ましくは炭素数6~10)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~10、より好ましくは炭素数1~6)、カルボキシル基、架橋性基、ならびに、酸素原子、カルボニル基、スルホニル基、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20、より好ましくは炭素数6~10)、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~10、より好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アルケニレン基(好ましくは炭素数2~10、より好ましくは炭素数2~6)、およびアルキニレン基(好ましくは炭素数2~10、より好ましくは炭素数2~6)と、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、カルボニル基、カルボキシル基、架橋性基、酸素原子、アルキレン基、アルキニレン基またはアリーレン基との組み合わせからなる基であることがより好ましい。
R11が表わす架橋性基は、上述した架橋性基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
これらの基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、水酸基、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アミド基、スルホニルアミド基などを挙げることができる。 R 11 represents a monovalent organic group. The monovalent organic group represented by R 11 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include those having a formula weight of 20 to 500 per molecule. The atom constituting the monovalent organic group represented by R 11 is preferably selected from a carbon atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a hydrogen atom, and a sulfur atom, and a carbon atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, and a hydrogen atom More preferably, it is selected from.
Specifically, R 11 is an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms) or an alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms). An alkynyl group (preferably having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having a carbon number) 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), carboxyl group, crosslinkable group, oxygen atom, carbonyl group, sulfonyl group, arylene group (preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 6 carbon atoms) 10) an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), A nylene group (preferably having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and an alkenyl group, alkynyl group, aryl group, carbonyl group, carboxyl group, crosslinkable group, oxygen atom, alkylene group, alkynylene group or It is more preferably a group consisting of a combination with an arylene group.
The crosslinkable group represented by R 11 is synonymous with the crosslinkable group described above, and the preferred range is also the same.
These groups may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amide group, and a sulfonylamide group.
また、(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、数平均分子量が1000~50000が好ましく、2000~40000がより好ましく、3000~30000がさらに好ましい。ここで、数平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーのポリスチレン換算値をもって定義される。
本発明で用いる(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、末端以外に、実質的に架橋性基を含まない構成とすることもできる。実質的に含まないとは、全繰り返し単位の内、架橋性基を含む繰り返し単位が1モル%以下であることをいう。 The polybenzoxazole precursor (A) has a weight average molecular weight of preferably 3000 to 200,000, more preferably 4000 to 100,000, and most preferably 5000 to 50000. By setting it as this range, the lithography performance and the cured film physical properties can be made excellent. Here, the weight average molecular weight is defined by a polystyrene conversion value of gel permeation chromatography.
The number average molecular weight of the (A) polybenzoxazole precursor is preferably 1000 to 50000, more preferably 2000 to 40000, and still more preferably 3000 to 30000. Here, the number average molecular weight is defined as a polystyrene equivalent value of gel permeation chromatography.
The polybenzoxazole precursor (A) used in the present invention can be configured to contain substantially no crosslinkable group other than the terminal. “Substantially free” means that the repeating unit containing a crosslinkable group is 1 mol% or less of all repeating units.
本発明で用いるポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体は、特開2008-224907号公報の記載を参酌して合成することができる。また、本発明では、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体を一般式(1-1)で表される基で封止することが好ましいが、かかる末端の封止は、末端をアミノ基とした樹脂を合成した後、末端のアミノ基を、カルボニル基またはスルホニル基を介して結合する、酸無水物または酸誘導体を用いてアミドとしてキャップする方法、或いは重合反応の際に単官能のアミン或いは酸クロリドを混ぜておくことにより一度に合成することができる。 << Method for Producing Polybenzoxazole Precursor >>
The polybenzoxazole precursor used in the present invention can be synthesized in consideration of the description in JP-A-2008-224907. Further, in the present invention, it is preferable to seal the polybenzoxazole precursor with a group represented by the general formula (1-1), but such terminal blocking was performed by synthesizing a resin having a terminal amino group. Later, the terminal amino group is bonded through a carbonyl group or a sulfonyl group, capped as an amide with an acid anhydride or acid derivative, or a monofunctional amine or acid chloride is mixed in the polymerization reaction. Can be synthesized at once.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する(B)光酸発生剤を含有する。このような酸発生剤を用いることにより、透明性の高い硬化膜を得ることができる。本発明で使用される光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300~450nmの活性光線に感応し、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造に制限されるものではない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。本発明で使用される光酸発生剤としては、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、2以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がさらに好ましい。また、pKaが2以下の強酸を用いた場合には耐熱性向上の効果がある。
なお本発明において、pKaは、基本的に25℃の水中におけるpKaを指す。水中で測定できないものは、測定に適する溶剤に変更し測定したものを指す。具体的には、化学便覧等に記載のpKaが参考にできる。 <(B) Photoacid generator in which pKa of generated acid is 4 or less>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention contains a photoacid generator (B) that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less. By using such an acid generator, a highly transparent cured film can be obtained. The photoacid generator used in the present invention is preferably a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 to 450 nm and generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, but is limited by its chemical structure. It is not something. Further, a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination. As the photoacid generator used in the present invention, a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less is more preferable, and a photoacid generator that generates an acid of 2 or less is more preferable. Further, when a strong acid having a pKa of 2 or less is used, there is an effect of improving heat resistance.
In the present invention, pKa basically refers to pKa in water at 25 ° C. Those that cannot be measured in water refer to those measured after changing to a solvent suitable for measurement. Specifically, the pKa described in the chemical handbook can be referred to.
Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子と炭素原子および/または酸素原子とからなる基を表し(C、H、O以外は含まない)、炭素原子と酸素原子との和が16以下である。Rは、水素原子、または炭素数8以下のアルキレンオキサイド基が好ましい。
R1は、炭素原子数16以下の1価有機基を表す。R1は、C、H、O、F以外を含まないことが好ましい。R1としては、例えば、メチル基、トリフルオロメチル基、プロピル基、フェニル基、トシル基などが挙げられる。 Examples of the photoacid generator include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, sulfonium salts and iodonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, it is preferable to use an oxime sulfonate compound or an imide sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity and insulating properties. These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more. Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diaryliodonium salts, triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, imidosulfonate compounds, and diazomethane derivatives include paragraph numbers 0083 to 0088 of JP2011-212494A, The compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0065 to 0072 of WO11 / 087011 can be exemplified, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. As the triarylsulfonium salt, a triarylsulfonium salt having the following structure can be preferably used.
R independently represents a group consisting of a hydrogen atom and a carbon atom and / or an oxygen atom (excluding other than C, H and O), and the sum of the carbon atom and the oxygen atom is 16 or less. R is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkylene oxide group having 8 or less carbon atoms.
R 1 represents a monovalent organic group having 16 or less carbon atoms. R 1 preferably does not contain other than C, H, O, and F. Examples of R 1 include a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a propyl group, a phenyl group, and a tosyl group.
一般式(B1-1)
General formula (B1-1)
R21のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の、直鎖状または分岐状アルキル基が好ましい。R21のアルキル基は、ハロゲン原子、炭素数6~11のアリール基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基、または、シクロアルキル基(7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニル基などの有橋式脂環基を含む、好ましくはビシクロアルキル基等)で置換されてもよい。
R21のアリール基としては、炭素数6~11のアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基またはナフチル基がより好ましい。R21のアリール基は、低級アルキル基、アルコキシ基あるいはハロゲン原子で置換されてもよい。 In general formula (B1-1), any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear, branched or cyclic. Acceptable substituents are described below.
The alkyl group for R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group represented by R 21 has a halogen atom, an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a cycloalkyl group (7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group). It may be substituted with a bridged alicyclic group, preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like.
As the aryl group for R 21, an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms is preferable, and a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferable. The aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with a lower alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom.
一般式(B1-2)
General formula (B1-2)
Xとしてのアルキル基は、炭素数1~4の直鎖状または分岐状アルキル基が好ましい。また、Xとしてのアルコキシ基は、炭素数1~4の直鎖状または分岐状アルコキシ基が好ましい。また、Xとしてのハロゲン原子は、塩素原子またはフッ素原子が好ましい。
m4は、0または1が好ましい。上記一般式(B1-2)中、m4が1であり、Xがメチル基であり、Xの置換位置がオルト位であり、R42が炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基、7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニルメチル基、またはp-トルイル基である化合物が特に好ましい。 Preferred ranges of R 42, the same as the preferable range of the R 21.
The alkyl group as X is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Further, the alkoxy group as X is preferably a linear or branched alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The halogen atom as X is preferably a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom.
m4 is preferably 0 or 1. In the general formula (B1-2), m4 is 1, X is a methyl group, the substitution position of X is an ortho position, R 42 is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 7, A compound which is a 7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornylmethyl group or a p-toluyl group is particularly preferred.
一般式(B1-3)
General formula (B1-3)
X1としては、炭素数1~5のアルコキシ基が好ましく、メトキシ基がより好ましい。
n4としては、0~2が好ましく、0~1が特に好ましい。
上記一般式(B1-3)で表される化合物の具体例および好ましいオキシムスルホネート化合物の具体例としては、特開2012-163937号公報の段落番号0080~0082の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 R 43 in the above general formula (B1-3) is methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, n-butyl group, n-octyl group, trifluoromethyl group, pentafluoroethyl group, perfluoro-n—. A propyl group, a perfluoro-n-butyl group, a p-tolyl group, a 4-chlorophenyl group or a pentafluorophenyl group is preferable, and an n-octyl group is particularly preferable.
X 1 is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methoxy group.
n4 is preferably from 0 to 2, particularly preferably from 0 to 1.
As specific examples of the compound represented by the above general formula (B1-3) and preferable examples of the oxime sulfonate compound, the description in paragraphs 0080 to 0082 of JP2012-163937A can be referred to. Incorporated in the description.
X101は-O-、-S-、-NH-、-NR105-、-CH2-、-CR106H-、または、-CR105R107-を表し、R105~R107はアルキル基、または、アリール基を表す。
R121~R124は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシ基、アミノ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アリールカルボニル基、アミド基、スルホ基、シアノ基、または、アリール基を表す。R121~R124のうち2つは、それぞれ互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
R121~R124としては、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、および、アルキル基が好ましく、また、R121~R124のうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合してアリール基を形成する態様もまた、好ましく挙げられる。中でも、R121~R124がいずれも水素原子である態様が感度の観点から好ましい。
既述の官能基は、いずれも、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。
上記一般式(OS-1)で表される化合物は、例えば、特開2012-163937号公報の段落番号0087~0089に記載されている一般式(OS-2)で表される化合物であることが好ましく、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 In the general formula (OS-1), R 101 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfo group, a cyano group, an aryl group, or Represents a heteroaryl group. R102 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
X 101 represents —O—, —S—, —NH—, —NR 105 —, —CH 2 —, —CR 106 H—, or —CR 105 R 107 —, wherein R 105 to R 107 are alkyl groups. Or an aryl group.
R 121 to R 124 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an amide group, a sulfo group, a cyano group, Or an aryl group is represented. Two of R 121 to R 124 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
R 121 to R 124 are preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom and an alkyl group, and an embodiment in which at least two of R 121 to R 124 are bonded to each other to form an aryl group is also preferred. Among these, an embodiment in which R 121 to R 124 are all hydrogen atoms is preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity.
Any of the aforementioned functional groups may further have a substituent.
The compound represented by the general formula (OS-1) is, for example, a compound represented by the general formula (OS-2) described in paragraph numbers 0087 to 0089 of JP2012-163937A Which is incorporated herein by reference.
本発明では、上記一般式(B1-1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を含有する化合物としては、下記一般式(OS-3)、下記一般式(OS-4)または下記一般式(OS-5)で表されるオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが好ましい。
上記一般式(OS-3)~(OS-5)については、例えば、特開2013-47765号公報の段落番号0034~0071の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (OS-1) that can be suitably used in the present invention include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0128 to 0132 of JP2011-221494A (exemplified compounds b-1 to b-34), but the present invention is not limited thereto.
In the present invention, the compound containing the oxime sulfonate structure represented by the general formula (B1-1) is represented by the following general formula (OS-3), the following general formula (OS-4), or the following general formula (OS- The oxime sulfonate compound represented by 5) is preferred.
With respect to the above general formulas (OS-3) to (OS-5), for example, the descriptions in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0071 of JP2013-47765A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
上記一般式(OS-6)~(OS-11)における好ましい範囲は、特開2011-221494号公報の段落番号0110~0112に記載される(OS-6)~(OS-11)の好ましい範囲と同様であり、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
上記一般式(OS-3)~上記一般式(OS-5)で表されるオキシムスルホネート化合物の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落番号0114~0120に記載の化合物が挙げられ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。本発明は、これらに限定されるものではない。 In addition, the compound containing an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the above general formula (B1-1) is, for example, a compound represented by the general formula (OS-6) described in paragraph 0117 of JP2012-163937A. Particularly preferred is a compound represented by any of (OS-11), the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Preferred ranges in the above general formulas (OS-6) to (OS-11) are preferred ranges of (OS-6) to (OS-11) described in paragraph numbers 0110 to 0112 of JP2011-221494A. The contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
Specific examples of the oxime sulfonate compound represented by the general formula (OS-3) to the general formula (OS-5) include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0114 to 0120 of JP2011-221494A. The contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. The present invention is not limited to these.
一般式(B1-4)
General formula (B1-4)
アルキル基の炭素数は、好ましくは3~10である。特にアルキル基が分岐構造を有する場合、炭素数3~6のアルキル基が好ましく、環状構造を有する場合、炭素数5~7のアルキル基が好ましい。
アルキル基としては、例えば、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、s-ブチル基、イソブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、イソペンチル基、ネオペンチル基、1,1-ジメチルプロピル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、オクチル基などが挙げられ、好ましくは、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、ネオペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基である。
アリール基の炭素数は、好ましくは6~12であり、より好ましくは6~8であり、さらに好ましくは6~7である。上記アリール基としては、フェニル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられ、好ましくは、フェニル基である。
R1が表すアルキル基およびアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、例えばハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、クロロ原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、直鎖、分岐または環状のアルキル基(例えばメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基など)、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、シアノ基、カルボキシル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシルオキシ基、アミノ基、ニトロ基、ヒドラジノ基、ヘテロ環基などが挙げられる。また、これらの基によってさらに置換されていてもよい。好ましくは、ハロゲン原子、メチル基である。 R 1 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl group is preferably a branched alkyl group or a cyclic alkyl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 3 to 10 carbon atoms. In particular, when the alkyl group has a branched structure, an alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable. When the alkyl group has a cyclic structure, an alkyl group having 5 to 7 carbon atoms is preferable.
Examples of the alkyl group include propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, s-butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, isopentyl group, neopentyl group, 1,1-dimethylpropyl group, hexyl group. 2-ethylhexyl group, cyclohexyl group, octyl group and the like, preferably isopropyl group, tert-butyl group, neopentyl group, and cyclohexyl group.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 8 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 7 carbon atoms. Examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, and a phenyl group is preferable.
The alkyl group and aryl group represented by R 1 may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chloro atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.), an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, Aryl group, acyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, cyano group, carboxyl group, hydroxyl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyloxy group, amino group, A nitro group, a hydrazino group, a heterocyclic group, etc. are mentioned. Further, these groups may be further substituted. Preferably, they are a halogen atom and a methyl group.
かさ高い置換基の中でも、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、ネオペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基が好ましく、tert-ブチル基、シクロヘキシル基がより好ましい。 In the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, R 1 is preferably an alkyl group from the viewpoint of transparency, and R 1 has a branched structure having 3 to 6 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of achieving both storage stability and sensitivity. An alkyl group, an alkyl group having a cyclic structure having 5 to 7 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group is preferable, and an alkyl group having a branched structure having 3 to 6 carbon atoms or an alkyl group having a cyclic structure having 5 to 7 carbon atoms is more preferable. . By adopting such a bulky group (particularly a bulky alkyl group) as R 1 , it becomes possible to further improve the transparency.
Among the bulky substituents, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a neopentyl group, and a cyclohexyl group are preferable, and a tert-butyl group and a cyclohexyl group are more preferable.
アリール基としては、炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましい。上記アリール基としては、フェニル基、ナフチル基、p-トルイル基(p-メチルフェニル基)などが挙げられ、好ましくは、フェニル基、p-トルイル基である。
ヘテロアリール基としては、例えば、ピロール基、インドール基、カルバゾール基、フラン基、チオフェン基などが挙げられる。
R2が表すアルキル基、アリール基、およびヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、R1が表すアルキル基およびアリール基が有していてもよい置換基と同義である。
R2は、アルキル基またはアリール基が好ましく、アリール基がより好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。フェニル基の置換基としてはメチル基が好ましい。 R 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group. The alkyl group represented by R 2 is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a neopentyl group, a hexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. It is a group.
As the aryl group, an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. Examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a p-toluyl group (p-methylphenyl group), and a phenyl group and a p-toluyl group are preferable.
Examples of the heteroaryl group include a pyrrole group, an indole group, a carbazole group, a furan group, and a thiophene group.
The alkyl group, aryl group, and heteroaryl group represented by R 2 may have a substituent. As a substituent, it is synonymous with the substituent which the alkyl group and aryl group which R < 1 > may have.
R 2 is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably an aryl group, and more preferably a phenyl group. As the substituent for the phenyl group, a methyl group is preferred.
R3~R6のうち、R3とR4、R4とR5、またはR5とR6が結合して環を形成してもよく、環としては、脂環または芳香環を形成していることが好ましく、ベンゼン環がより好ましい。
R3~R6は、水素原子、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、クロロ原子、臭素原子)、または、R3とR4、R4とR5、またはR5とR6が結合してベンゼン環を構成していることが好ましく、水素原子、メチル基、フッ素原子、クロロ原子、臭素原子またはR3とR4、R4とR5、またはR5とR6が結合してベンゼン環を構成していることがより好ましい。
R3~R6の好ましい態様は以下の通りである。
(態様1)少なくとも2つは水素原子である。
(態様2)アルキル基、アリール基、またはハロゲン原子の数は、1つ以下である。
(態様3)R3とR4、R4とR5、またはR5とR6が結合してベンゼン環を構成している。
(態様4)上記態様1と2を満たす態様、および/または、上記態様1と3を満たす態様。
Xは、-O-またはS-を表す。 R 3 to R 6 each represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chloro atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom). The alkyl group represented by R 3 to R 6 has the same meaning as the alkyl group represented by R 2 , and the preferred range is also the same. The aryl group represented by R 3 to R 6 has the same meaning as the aryl group represented by R 1 , and the preferred range is also the same.
Among R 3 to R 6 , R 3 and R 4 , R 4 and R 5 , or R 5 and R 6 may combine to form a ring, and the ring may form an alicyclic ring or an aromatic ring. It is preferable that a benzene ring is more preferable.
R 3 to R 6 are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chloro atom, bromine atom), or R 3 and R 4 , R 4 and R 5 , or R 5 and R 6. A benzene ring is preferably formed, and a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a fluorine atom, a chloro atom, a bromine atom, or R 3 and R 4 , R 4 and R 5 , or R 5 and R 6 are combined to form a benzene ring Is more preferable.
Preferred embodiments of R 3 to R 6 are as follows.
(Aspect 1) At least two are hydrogen atoms.
(Aspect 2) The number of alkyl groups, aryl groups, or halogen atoms is one or less.
(Aspect 3) R 3 and R 4 , R 4 and R 5 , or R 5 and R 6 are combined to form a benzene ring.
(Aspect 4) An aspect satisfying the
X represents —O— or S—.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、(C)溶剤を含有する。本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、本発明の必須成分と、さらに後述の任意の成分を溶剤に溶解した溶液として調製されることが好ましい。本発明の組成物の調製に用いられる溶剤としては、必須成分および任意成分を均一に溶解し、各成分と反応しないものが用いられる。
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物に使用される溶剤としては、公知の溶剤を用いることができ、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートなどのプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテルなどのジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、エステル類、ケトン類、アミド類、γ-ブチロラクトンなどのラクトン類、ピロリドン類等が例示できる。また、本発明の感光性樹脂組成物に使用される溶剤の具体例としては特開2011-221494号公報の段落番号0174~0178に記載の溶剤、特開2012-194290号公報の段落番号0167~0168に記載の溶剤も挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 <(C) Solvent>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention contains (C) a solvent. The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is preferably prepared as a solution in which the essential components of the present invention and further optional components described below are dissolved in a solvent. As a solvent used for the preparation of the composition of the present invention, a solvent that uniformly dissolves essential components and optional components and does not react with each component is used.
As the solvent used in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, known solvents can be used, such as ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl. Ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers such as diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, Dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol mono Ruki ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, lactones such as γ- butyrolactone, pyrrolidones and the like. Specific examples of the solvent used in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention include the solvents described in paragraph numbers 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-221494A, and paragraph numbers 0167 to of JP2012-194290A. Also included are the solvents described in 0168, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点146℃)、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点158℃)、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-ブチルエーテル(沸点155℃)、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-プロピルエーテル(沸点131℃)が例示できる。
沸点160℃以上の溶剤としては、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(沸点170℃)、ジエチレングリコールメチルエチルエーテル(沸点176℃)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート(沸点160℃)、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点213℃)、3-メトキシブチルエーテルアセテート(沸点171℃)、ジエチレングリコールジエチエルエーテル(沸点189℃)、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点162℃)、プロピレングリコールジアセテート(沸点190℃)、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点220℃)、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点175℃)、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート(沸点232℃)、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン(沸点204℃)、ガンマブチロラクトン(沸点204℃)が例示できる。 Further, the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof.
Solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C. include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), propylene glycol An example is methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
Solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate. (Boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (Boiling point 220 ° C.), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C.), 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 232 ° C.), N Methyl-2-pyrrolidone (boiling point 204 ° C.), gamma-butyrolactone (boiling point 204 ° C.) can be exemplified.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、ベンゼン環および/またはフェノール性水酸基と反応する基からなる架橋性基を2つ以上有する架橋剤(以下、「(D)架橋剤」ともいう)を少なくとも1種含有する。本発明では、架橋剤が、ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体に含まれるベンゼン環またはフェノール性水酸基と反応して、ポリベンゾオキサゾール間に架橋構造を形成する。
ベンゼン環またはフェノール性水酸基と反応する基からなる架橋性基としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、ブロックイソシアネート基が挙げられる。本発明では、このような架橋性基を1分子中に2つ以上有していれば、それぞれの架橋性基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。好ましくは、1分子中に含まれる架橋性基は同一である。
本発明で用いる(D)架橋剤は、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびブロックイソシアネート基から選択される架橋性基を2つ以上有する架橋剤であることが好ましく、エポキシ基および/またはアルコキシメチル基を有することがより好ましい。より具体的には、(D)架橋剤としては、分子内に2個以上のエポキシ基を有する化合物、分子内に2個以上のアルコキシメチル基および/またはメチロール基を含有する架橋剤、分子内に2個以上のブロックイソシアネート基を含有する化合物を好ましい例としてあげることができる。これらの(D)架橋剤は、(A)成分のフェノール性水酸基やベンゼン環と反応し、(A)成分同士を架橋させることができ、また、この架橋反応は酸発生剤から発生した酸により加速されるため、本発明の感光性樹脂組成物により得られる硬化膜をより強固な膜とすることができる。
本発明で用いる架橋剤の分子量は、150~30000が好ましく、200~10000がより好ましい。このような範囲とすることにより、本発明の効果がより効果的に発揮される。
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物中における(D)架橋剤の含有量は、上記(A)成分の合計100質量部に対し、1~50質量部であることが好ましく、3~30質量部であることがより好ましく、5~20質量部であることがさらに好ましい。この範囲で添加することにより、機械的強度および耐溶剤性に優れた硬化膜が得られる。(D)架橋剤は複数を併用することもでき、その場合は(D)架橋剤を全て合算して含有量を計算する。
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、上記(D)架橋剤以外の架橋剤を併用することもできる。その場合、架橋剤全体における(D)架橋剤の割合は50質量%以上が好ましく、80質量%以上がより好ましい。 <(D) Crosslinking agent>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention has at least one cross-linking agent (hereinafter also referred to as “(D) cross-linking agent”) having two or more cross-linkable groups composed of groups that react with a benzene ring and / or a phenolic hydroxyl group. Contains seeds. In the present invention, the crosslinking agent reacts with a benzene ring or a phenolic hydroxyl group contained in the polybenzoxazole precursor to form a crosslinked structure between the polybenzoxazoles.
The crosslinkable group composed of a group that reacts with a benzene ring or a phenolic hydroxyl group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group. In the present invention, as long as two or more such crosslinkable groups are contained in one molecule, each crosslinkable group may be the same or different. Preferably, the crosslinkable groups contained in one molecule are the same.
The (D) crosslinking agent used in the present invention is preferably a crosslinking agent having two or more crosslinking groups selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group, and an epoxy group and / or More preferably, it has an alkoxymethyl group. More specifically, (D) the crosslinking agent includes a compound having two or more epoxy groups in the molecule, a crosslinking agent containing two or more alkoxymethyl groups and / or methylol groups in the molecule, Preferred examples include compounds containing two or more blocked isocyanate groups. These (D) crosslinking agents can react with the phenolic hydroxyl group or benzene ring of component (A) to crosslink components (A), and this crosslinking reaction is caused by the acid generated from the acid generator. Since it accelerates | cures, the cured film obtained by the photosensitive resin composition of this invention can be made into a firmer film | membrane.
The molecular weight of the crosslinking agent used in the present invention is preferably 150 to 30000, and more preferably 200 to 10000. By setting it as such a range, the effect of this invention is exhibited more effectively.
The content of the crosslinking agent (D) in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass in total of the component (A), and 3 to 30 parts by mass. More preferred is 5 to 20 parts by mass. By adding in this range, a cured film having excellent mechanical strength and solvent resistance can be obtained. A plurality of (D) crosslinking agents can be used in combination. In that case, the content is calculated by adding all (D) crosslinking agents.
The photosensitive resin composition of this invention can also use together crosslinking agents other than the said (D) crosslinking agent. In that case, the proportion of the (D) crosslinking agent in the entire crosslinking agent is preferably 50% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物では、(D)架橋剤として、分子内に2個以上のエポキシ基を有する化合物を用いることができる。分子内に2個以上のエポキシ基を有する化合物の具体例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂、エポキシ基含有構成単位有するアクリル樹脂等を挙げることができる。 << Compound having two or more epoxy groups in the molecule >>
In the photosensitive resin composition of this invention, the compound which has a 2 or more epoxy group in a molecule | numerator can be used as (D) crosslinking agent. Specific examples of compounds having two or more epoxy groups in the molecule include bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, phenol novolac type epoxy resins, cresol novolac type epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins, and epoxy group containing An acrylic resin having a structural unit can be given.
これらの中でも、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂および脂肪族エポキシ樹脂がより好ましく挙げられ、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂が特に好ましく挙げられる。 These are available as commercial products. For example, JER152, JER157S70, JER157S65, JER806, JER828, JER1007 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Co., Ltd.), and the like are commercially available products described in paragraph No. 0189 of JP2011-221494, etc. EX-611, EX-612, EX-614, EX-614B, EX-622, EX-512, EX-521, EX-411, EX-421, EX-313, EX-314, EX-321, EX- 321L, EX-211, EX-212, EX-810, EX-811, EX-850, EX-851, EX-821, EX-830, EX-832, EX-841, EX-911, EX-941, EX-920, EX-931, EX-212L, EX-214L, X-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L, DLC-201, DLC-203, DLC-204, DLC-205, DLC-206, DLC-301, DLC-402 (manufactured by Nagase Chemtech), YH-300 YH-301, YH-302, YH-315, YH-324, YH-325 (manufactured by NS Etc.). These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Among these, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and bisphenol A type epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物では、(D)架橋剤として、アルコキシメチル基またはメチロール基を含有する架橋剤を用いることができる。分子内に2個以上のアルコキシメチル基またはメチロール基を含有する架橋剤としては、下記一般式(1)または一般式(2)で表される構造を分子内に2個以上有する架橋剤であり、アルコキシメチル基とメチロール基のいずれか一方または両方を合計で2個以上分子内に含有する。
-CH2OR1 (1)
(式中、R1は炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基を表し、炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。)
-CH2OH (2) << Crosslinking agent containing two or more alkoxymethyl groups or methylol groups in the molecule >>
In the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, a crosslinking agent containing an alkoxymethyl group or a methylol group can be used as the (D) crosslinking agent. The crosslinking agent containing two or more alkoxymethyl groups or methylol groups in the molecule is a crosslinking agent having two or more structures represented by the following general formula (1) or general formula (2) in the molecule. , One or both of an alkoxymethyl group and a methylol group are contained in the molecule in a total of two or more.
-CH 2 OR 1 (1)
(In the formula, R 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methyl group.)
—CH 2 OH (2)
これらの架橋性化合物のうち、アルコキシメチル化メラミン、メチロール化メラミン、アルコキシメチル化ベンゾグアナミン、メチロール化ベンゾグアナミン、アルコキシメチル化グリコールウリル、メチロール化グリコールウリルが好ましい架橋性化合物として挙げられ、透明性の観点から、アルコキシメチル化グリコールウリルおよびメチロール化グリコールウリルが特に好ましい。
本発明では、特開2012-8223号公報の段落番号0107に記載のアルコキシメチル基含有架橋剤、を好ましく用いることができ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of the crosslinking agent in which an alkoxymethyl group or a methylol group is bonded to a nitrogen atom include alkoxymethylated melamine, methylolated melamine, alkoxymethylated benzoguanamine, methylolated benzoguanamine, alkoxymethylated glycoluril, methylolated glycoluril, alkoxy Methylated urea and methylolated urea are preferred. Alkoxymethylated melamine, alkoxymethylated benzoguanamine, alkoxymethylated glycoluril, and alkoxymethylated urea convert methylolated melamine, methylolated benzoguanamine, methylolated glycoluril, or methylol group of methylolated urea to alkoxymethyl group, respectively. Can be obtained. Examples of the alkoxymethyl group include a methoxymethyl group, an ethoxymethyl group, a propoxymethyl group, and a butoxymethyl group, and the methoxymethyl group is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of outgas generation amount.
Among these crosslinkable compounds, alkoxymethylated melamine, methylolated melamine, alkoxymethylated benzoguanamine, methylolated benzoguanamine, alkoxymethylated glycoluril, methylolated glycoluril are mentioned as preferred crosslinkable compounds, from the viewpoint of transparency Alkoxymethylated glycoluril and methylolated glycoluril are particularly preferred.
In the present invention, the alkoxymethyl group-containing crosslinking agent described in paragraph No. 0107 of JP2012-8223A can be preferably used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物では、(D)架橋剤として、分子内に2個以上のブロックイソシアネート基を含有する化合物を用いることができる。
本発明におけるブロックイソシアネート基とは、熱によりイソシアネート基を生成することが可能な基であり、例えば、ブロック剤とイソシアネート基とを反応させイソシアネート基を保護した基が好ましく例示できる。また、上記ブロックイソシアネート基は、90℃~250℃の熱によりイソシアネート基を生成することが可能な基であることが好ましい。
また、ブロックイソシアネート化合物としては、その骨格は特に限定されるものではなく、1分子中にイソシアネート基を2個以上有するものであればどのようなものでもよく、脂肪族、脂環族または芳香族のポリイソシアネートであってよいが、例えば2,4-トリレンジイソシアネート、2,6-トリレンジイソシアネート、イソホロンジイソシアネート、1,6-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,3-トリメチレンジイソシアネート、1,4-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート、2,2,4-トリメチルヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、2,4,4-トリメチルヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,9-ノナメチレンジイソシアネート、1,10-デカメチレンジイソシアネート、1,4-シクロヘキサンジイソシアネート、2,2'-ジエチルエーテルジイソシアネート、ジフェニルメタン-4,4'-ジイソシアネート、o-キシレンジイソシアネート、m-キシレンジイソシアネート、p-キシレンジイソシアネート、メチレンビス(シクロヘキシルイソシアネート)、シクロヘキサン-1,3-ジメチレンジイソシアネート、シクロヘキサン-1,4-ジメチレレンジイソシアネート、1,5-ナフタレンジイソシアネート、p-フェニレンジイソシアネート、3,3'-メチレンジトリレン-4,4'-ジイソシアネート、4,4'-ジフェニルエーテルジイソシアネート、テトラクロロフェニレンジイソシアネート、ノルボルナンジイソシアネート、水素化1,3-キシリレンジイソシアネート、水素化1,4-キシリレンジイソシアネート等のイソシアネート化合物およびこれらの化合物から派生するプレポリマー型の骨格の化合物を好適に用いることができる。これらの中でも、トリレンジイソシアネート(TDI)やジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート(MDI)、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート(HDI)、イソホロンジイソシアネート(IPDI)が特に好ましい。
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物におけるブロックイソシアネート化合物の母構造としては、ビウレット型、イソシアヌレート型、アダクト型、2官能プレポリマー型等を挙げることができる。
上記ブロックイソシアネート化合物のブロック構造を形成するブロック剤としては、オキシム化合物、ラクタム化合物、フェノール化合物、アルコール化合物、アミン化合物、活性メチレン化合物、ピラゾール化合物、メルカプタン化合物、イミダゾール系化合物、イミド系化合物等を挙げることができる。これらの中でも、オキシム化合物、ラクタム化合物、フェノール化合物、アルコール化合物、アミン化合物、活性メチレン化合物、ピラゾール化合物から選ばれるブロック剤が特に好ましい。 << Compound containing two or more blocked isocyanate groups in the molecule >>
In the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, a compound containing two or more blocked isocyanate groups in the molecule can be used as the (D) crosslinking agent.
The blocked isocyanate group in the present invention is a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat. For example, a group obtained by reacting a blocking agent with an isocyanate group to protect the isocyanate group can be preferably exemplified. The blocked isocyanate group is preferably a group capable of generating an isocyanate group by heat at 90 ° C. to 250 ° C.
Further, the skeleton of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, and any skeleton having two or more isocyanate groups in one molecule may be used, and may be aliphatic, alicyclic or aromatic. For example, 2,4-tolylene diisocyanate, 2,6-tolylene diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-trimethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-tetraisocyanate Methylene diisocyanate, 2,2,4-trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate, 2,4,4-trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,9-nonamethylene diisocyanate, 1,10-decamethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-
Examples of the matrix structure of the blocked isocyanate compound in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention include biuret type, isocyanurate type, adduct type, and bifunctional prepolymer type.
Examples of the blocking agent that forms the block structure of the blocked isocyanate compound include oxime compounds, lactam compounds, phenol compounds, alcohol compounds, amine compounds, active methylene compounds, pyrazole compounds, mercaptan compounds, imidazole compounds, and imide compounds. be able to. Among these, a blocking agent selected from oxime compounds, lactam compounds, phenol compounds, alcohol compounds, amine compounds, active methylene compounds, and pyrazole compounds is particularly preferable.
上記ラクタム化合物としてはε-カプロラクタム、γ-ブチロラクタム等が例示できる。
上記フェノール化合物としては、フェノール、ナフトール、クレゾール、キシレノール、ハロゲン置換フェノール等が例示できる。
上記アルコール化合物としては、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、ブタノール、シクロヘキサノール、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、乳酸アルキル等が例示できる。
上記アミン化合物としては、1級アミンおよび2級アミンが上げられ、芳香族アミン、脂肪族アミン、脂環族アミンいずれでもよく、アニリン、ジフェニルアミン、エチレンイミン、ポリエチレンイミン等が例示できる。
上記活性メチレン化合物としては、マロン酸ジエチル、マロン酸ジメチル、アセト酢酸エチル、アセト酢酸メチル等が例示できる。
上記ピラゾール化合物としては、ピラゾール、メチルピラゾール、ジメチルピラゾール等が例示できる。
上記メルカプタン化合物としては、アルキルメルカプタン、アリールメルカプタン等が例示できる。 Examples of the oxime compound include oxime and ketoxime, and specific examples include acetoxime, formaldoxime, cyclohexane oxime, methyl ethyl ketone oxime, cyclohexanone oxime, benzophenone oxime, and acetoxime.
Examples of the lactam compound include ε-caprolactam and γ-butyrolactam.
Examples of the phenol compound include phenol, naphthol, cresol, xylenol, and halogen-substituted phenol.
Examples of the alcohol compound include methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, cyclohexanol, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, and alkyl lactate.
Examples of the amine compound include primary amines and secondary amines, which may be aromatic amines, aliphatic amines, and alicyclic amines, and examples thereof include aniline, diphenylamine, ethyleneimine, and polyethyleneimine.
Examples of the active methylene compound include diethyl malonate, dimethyl malonate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl acetoacetate and the like.
Examples of the pyrazole compound include pyrazole, methylpyrazole, dimethylpyrazole and the like.
Examples of the mercaptan compound include alkyl mercaptans and aryl mercaptans.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、(D)架橋剤とともに、(D)架橋剤以外の架橋剤として、メタクリロイル基またはアクリロイル基を含む化合物を使用してもよい。メタクリロイル基またはアクリロイル基を含む化合物とは、アクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステルからなる群から選択される化合物である。アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基は1分子中に2個以上、さらに好ましくは3官能以上ある化合物であることが好ましい。 << Compound containing two or more methacryloyl groups and / or acryloyl groups in the molecule >>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may use a compound containing a methacryloyl group or an acryloyl group as a crosslinking agent other than the (D) crosslinking agent, together with the (D) crosslinking agent. The compound containing a methacryloyl group or an acryloyl group is a compound selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid esters and methacrylic acid esters. It is preferable that the acryloyl group and the methacryloyl group are compounds having two or more, more preferably trifunctional or more in one molecule.
3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリ((メタ)アクリロイロキシエチル)フォスフェート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。
好ましい市販品としては、日本化薬社製 KAYARAD DPHA、新中村化学工業社製 NKエステルシリーズで、二官能のA-200、A-400、A-600、A-1000、ABE-300、A-BPE-4、A-BPE-10、A-BPE-20、A-BPE-30、A-BPP-3、A-DOD、A-DCP、A-IBD-2E、A-NPG、701A、A-B1206PE、A-HD-N、A-NOD-N、APG-100、APG-200、APG-400、APG-700、1G、2G、3G、4G、9G、14G、23G、BG、BD、HD-N、NOD、IND、BPE-100、BPE-200、BPE-300、BPE-500、BPE-900、BPE-1300N、NPG、DCP、1206PE、701、3PG、9PG、3官能のA-9300、AT-30E、A-TMPT-3EO、A-TMPT-9EO、A-TMPT-3PO、A-TMM-3、A-TMM-3L、A-TMM-3LM-N、TMPT、TMPT-9EO、4官能以上のATM-35E、ATM-4E、AD-TMP、AD-TMP-L、ATM-4P、A-TMMT、A-DPH等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the bifunctional (meth) acrylate include ethylene glycol (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, Examples include tetraethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, bisphenoxyethanol full orange acrylate, and bisphenoxyethanol full orange acrylate.
Examples of the tri- or more functional (meth) acrylate include trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, tri ((meth) acryloyloxyethyl) phosphate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate. , Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, and the like.
Preferable commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK ester series manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., bifunctional A-200, A-400, A-600, A-1000, ABE-300, A- BPE-4, A-BPE-10, A-BPE-20, A-BPE-30, A-BPP-3, A-DOD, A-DCP, A-IBD-2E, A-NPG, 701A, A- B1206PE, A-HD-N, A-NOD-N, APG-100, APG-200, APG-400, APG-700, 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G, 9G, 14G, 23G, BG, BD, HD- N, NOD, IND, BPE-100, BPE-200, BPE-300, BPE-500, BPE-900, BPE-1300N, NPG, DCP, 1206PE, 701, 3 G, 9PG, trifunctional A-9300, AT-30E, A-TMPT-3EO, A-TMPT-9EO, A-TMPT-3PO, A-TMM-3, A-TMM-3L, A-TMM-3LM -N, TMPT, TMPT-9EO, tetra- or higher functional ATM-35E, ATM-4E, AD-TMP, AD-TMP-L, ATM-4P, A-TMMT, A-DPH and the like can be mentioned.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、(D)架橋剤とともに、(D)架橋剤以外の架橋剤として、オキセタン基を含む化合物を使用してもよい。オキセタン基は分子内に2個以上あることが好ましい。分子内に2個以上のオキセタニル基を有する化合物としては、特開2008-224970号公報の段落0134~0145記載の化合物が挙げられ、その内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。具体例としては、アロンオキセタンOXT-121、OXT-221、OX-SQ、PNOX(以上、東亞合成(株)製)を用いることができる。 << Compound containing two or more oxetane groups in the molecule >>
The photosensitive resin composition of this invention may use the compound containing an oxetane group as crosslinking agents other than (D) crosslinking agent with (D) crosslinking agent. It is preferable that there are two or more oxetane groups in the molecule. Examples of the compound having two or more oxetanyl groups in the molecule include the compounds described in paragraphs 0134 to 0145 of JP-A-2008-224970, the contents of which are incorporated herein. As specific examples, Aron Oxetane OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, and PNOX (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be used.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された化合物(「(E)化合物」ともいう)を含有していてもよい。酸基が酸分解性基で保護された化合物とは、酸基が酸分解性基で保護されていて、酸の作用により保護基が脱離してアルカリ溶解性が増大する化合物である。(E)化合物は、非露光部のアルカリ溶解性を減少させ、露光部のアルカリ溶解性を増大させる役目を担う。酸基としては、カルボキシ基またはフェノール性水酸基が好ましい。
酸分解性基としては、酸の作用で分解する基であれば特に制限は無い。アセタール基、ケタール基、シリル基、シリルエーテル基を、挙げることができ、感度の観点からアセタール基が好ましい。保護基の具体例としては、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基、イソプロポキシカルボニル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基、テトラヒドロフラニル基、エトキシエチル基、メトキシエチル基、エトキシメチル基、トリメチルシリル基、tert-ブトキシカルボニルメチル基、トリメチルシリルエーテル基などが挙げられる。感度、安定性の観点からエトキシエチル基、テトラヒドロフラニル基が好ましい。 <(E) Compound in which acid group is protected with acid-decomposable group>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain a compound in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group (also referred to as “(E) compound”). The compound in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is a compound in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group, and the protecting group is eliminated by the action of an acid to increase alkali solubility. The compound (E) plays a role of decreasing the alkali solubility in the non-exposed area and increasing the alkali solubility in the exposed area. As the acid group, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
The acid-decomposable group is not particularly limited as long as it is a group that can be decomposed by the action of an acid. An acetal group, a ketal group, a silyl group, and a silyl ether group can be mentioned, and an acetal group is preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Specific examples of the protecting group include tert-butoxycarbonyl group, isopropoxycarbonyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, tetrahydrofuranyl group, ethoxyethyl group, methoxyethyl group, ethoxymethyl group, trimethylsilyl group, tert-butoxycarbonylmethyl group, And trimethylsilyl ether group. From the viewpoints of sensitivity and stability, an ethoxyethyl group and a tetrahydrofuranyl group are preferred.
また、(E)化合物は、溶解抑止能力向上の観点から、芳香環、複素環および脂環構造のいずれかを含むことが好ましい。 The compound (E) may be a polymer (for example, more than 5000 or even more than 10,000) or a low molecule (for example, 5000 or less). More preferred. In the case of a polymer, the molecular weight is a number average molecular weight determined by polystyrene conversion. As a lower limit of molecular weight, 150 or more are preferred and 300 or more are more preferred.
Moreover, it is preferable that a compound (E) contains either an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an alicyclic structure from a viewpoint of a dissolution inhibitory ability improvement.
また、(E)化合物は、(A)成分との相溶性向上の観点から、芳香環または複素環を含むことが好ましい。
以下、(E)化合物の好ましい態様について説明する。 The compound (E) preferably has two or more acid groups protected in the molecule from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity.
Moreover, it is preferable that a (E) compound contains an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring from a viewpoint of compatibility improvement with (A) component.
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the compound (E) will be described.
一般式(E-1-1)
Formula (E-1-1)
アルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~8のアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がさらに好ましく、炭素数1~4のアルキル基が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。また、アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖のアルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、t-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基等が挙げられる。
アリール基としては、炭素数6~20のアリール基が好ましく、炭素数6~14のアリール基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリール基がさらに好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。アリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、アントラセニル基等が挙げられ、中でもフェニル基が好ましい。 R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
As the alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is more preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is particularly preferable. preferable. The alkyl group may have a substituent. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably a linear alkyl group. Examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a t-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.
As the aryl group, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is further preferable. The aryl group may have a substituent. As an aryl group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthracenyl group etc. are mentioned, for example, A phenyl group is especially preferable.
一般式(E-1-2)
Formula (E-1-2)
一般式(E-1-2)で表される化合物の合成段階で、aが0~nまでの分布を有する混合物として得られることもあるが、混合物のまま好適に用いることができる。そしてn-aは1以上、好ましくは1~7の整数である。また、Arは置換されていてもよいアリール基を表し、具体的にはフェニル基、ナフチル基等が挙げられ、その置換基としては塩素原子等のハロゲン原子;メチル基、tert-ブチル基等のアルキル基;メトキシ基等のアルコキシ基等を好ましく挙げられる。 a represents an integer of 0 or more, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, and more preferably 0. n represents an integer of 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 8, more preferably an integer of 2 to 6, and more preferably 2.
In the synthesis step of the compound represented by the general formula (E-1-2), a mixture having a distribution of 0 to n may be obtained, but the mixture can be preferably used as it is. Na is an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1-7. Ar represents an optionally substituted aryl group, and specific examples thereof include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom such as a chlorine atom; a methyl group, a tert-butyl group and the like. Preferred examples include alkyl groups; alkoxy groups such as methoxy groups.
一般式(E-1-3)
General formula (E-1-3)
R3は、一般式(E-1-1)におけるR3と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 R 1 and R 2 has the same meaning as R 1 and R 2 in the general formula (E-1-1), and preferred ranges are also the same.
R 3 has the same meaning as R 3 in formula (E-1-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
一般式(E-1-4)
General formula (E-1-4)
また、本発明では、(A)ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体が酸分解性基を含むため、(E)化合物を本発明の組成物の全固形分の1質量%以下とすることもできる。 When blended, the content of the compound (E) is 5 to 50 parts by mass, and more preferably 10 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the (A) polybenzoxazole precursor. By setting the content to 5 to 50 parts by mass, film physical properties and sensitivity can be improved. Moreover, 2 or more types of (E) compounds can be used, and when using 2 or more types, the total amount becomes the said range.
Moreover, in this invention, since (A) polybenzoxazole precursor contains an acid-decomposable group, (E) compound can also be made into 1 mass% or less of the total solid of the composition of this invention.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物には、上記成分に加えて、必要に応じて、密着改良剤(アルコキシシラン化合物)、増感剤、塩基性化合物、界面活性剤、酸化防止剤を好ましく加えることができる。さらに本発明の感光性樹脂組成物には、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、可塑剤、熱ラジカル発生剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、および、有機または無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤を加えることができる。また、これらの化合物としては、例えば特開2012-88459号公報の段落番号0201~0224の記載の化合物を使用することができ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 <Other ingredients>
To the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, in addition to the above components, an adhesion improver (alkoxysilane compound), a sensitizer, a basic compound, a surfactant, and an antioxidant are preferably added as necessary. Can do. Furthermore, the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention includes an acid proliferation agent, a development accelerator, a plasticizer, a thermal radical generator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, and an organic or inorganic precipitation inhibitor. Known additives such as can be added. Further, as these compounds, for example, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0201 to 0224 of JP2012-8859A can be used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、密着改良剤としてアルコキシシラン化合物を含有してもよい。アルコキシシラン化合物を用いると、本発明の感光性樹脂組成物により形成された膜と基板との密着性を向上できたり、本発明の感光性樹脂組成物により形成された膜の性質を調整することができる。本発明の感光性樹脂組成物に用いることができるアルコキシシラン化合物は、基材となる無機物、例えば、シリコン、酸化シリコン、窒化シリコン等のシリコン化合物、金、銅、モリブデン、チタン、アルミニウム等の金属と絶縁膜との密着性を向上させる化合物であることが好ましい。具体的には、公知のシランカップリング剤等も有効である。
シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランなどのγ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルジアルコキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシランなどのγ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルジアルコキシシラン、γ-クロロプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、β-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリアルコキシシラン、ビニルトリアルコキシシランが挙げられる。これらのうち、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランやγ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランがより好ましく、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランがさらに好ましく、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランがよりさらに好ましい。これらは1種単独または2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。 << Adhesion improver >>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain an alkoxysilane compound as an adhesion improving agent. When an alkoxysilane compound is used, the adhesion between the film formed from the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention and the substrate can be improved, or the properties of the film formed from the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention can be adjusted. Can do. The alkoxysilane compound that can be used in the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is a base material, for example, a silicon compound such as silicon, silicon oxide, or silicon nitride, or a metal such as gold, copper, molybdenum, titanium, or aluminum. Preferably, the compound improves the adhesion between the insulating film and the insulating film. Specifically, a known silane coupling agent or the like is also effective.
Examples of silane coupling agents include γ-glycid such as γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, and γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane. Γ-methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane such as xylpropyltrialkoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyl dialkoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, γ-methacryloxypropyl dialkoxysilane, γ-chloropropyltrialkoxy Examples thereof include silane, γ-mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, β- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, and vinyltrialkoxysilane. Of these, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and γ-methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is more preferable. Further preferred. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物がアルコキシシラン化合物を含む場合、アルコキシシラン化合物の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部に対して、0.1~30質量部が好ましく、0.5~20質量部がより好ましい。アルコキシシラン化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種類以上のアルコキシシラン化合物を用いる場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となる。 A well-known thing can be used for an alkoxysilane compound, without specifically limiting to these.
When the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention contains an alkoxysilane compound, the content of the alkoxysilane compound is preferably 0.1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. 0.5 to 20 parts by mass is more preferable. An alkoxysilane compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When using 2 or more types of alkoxysilane compounds, the total amount becomes the said range.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、光酸発生剤との組み合わせにおいて、その分解を促進させるために、増感剤を含有することが好ましい。増感剤は、活性光線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、光酸発生剤と接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより光酸発生剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、酸を生成する。好ましい増感剤の例としては、以下の化合物類に属しており、かつ350nmから450nmの波長域のいずれかに吸収波長を有する化合物を挙げることができる。 << Sensitizer >>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention preferably contains a sensitizer in order to promote the decomposition in combination with the photoacid generator. The sensitizer absorbs actinic rays and enters an electronically excited state. The sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. Thereby, a photo-acid generator raise | generates a chemical change and decomposes | disassembles and produces | generates an acid. Examples of preferred sensitizers include compounds belonging to the following compounds and having an absorption wavelength in any of the wavelength ranges from 350 nm to 450 nm.
これら増感剤の中でも、多核芳香族類、アクリドン類、スチリル類、ベーススチリル類、クマリン類が好ましく、多核芳香族類がより好ましい。多核芳香族類の中でもアントラセン誘導体が最も好ましい。 Polynuclear aromatics (eg, pyrene, perylene, triphenylene, anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-diethoxyanthracene, 3,7-dimethoxyanthracene, 9,10-dipropyloxyanthracene), xanthenes (Eg, fluorescein, eosin, erythrosine, rhodamine B, rose bengal), xanthones (eg, xanthone, thioxanthone, dimethylthioxanthone, diethylthioxanthone), cyanines (eg, thiacarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine), merocyanines ( For example, merocyanine, carbomerocyanine), rhodocyanines, oxonols, thiazines (eg, thionine, methylene blue, toluidine blue), acridines (eg, acridine oleoresin) Di, chloroflavin, acriflavine), acridones (eg, acridone, 10-butyl-2-chloroacridone), anthraquinones (eg, anthraquinone), squaliums (eg, squalium), styryls, base styryls ( For example, 2- [2- [4- (dimethylamino) phenyl] ethenyl] benzoxazole), coumarins (for example, 7-diethylamino 4-methylcoumarin, 7-hydroxy 4-methylcoumarin, 2,3,6,7 -Tetrahydro-9-methyl-1H, 5H, 11H [1] benzopyrano [6,7,8-ij] quinolizine-11-non).
Among these sensitizers, polynuclear aromatics, acridones, styryls, base styryls, and coumarins are preferable, and polynuclear aromatics are more preferable. Of the polynuclear aromatics, anthracene derivatives are most preferred.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、塩基性化合物を含有してもよい。塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅レジストで用いられるものの中から任意に選択して使用することができる。例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落番号0204~0207に記載の化合物、特開2012-133091号公報の段落番号0141~0145に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 << basic compound >>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain a basic compound. The basic compound can be arbitrarily selected from those used in chemically amplified resists. Examples include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids, and the like. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0204 to 0207 of JP2011-221494A and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0141 to 0145 of JP2012-133301A. It is incorporated herein.
芳香族アミンとしては、例えば、アニリン、ベンジルアミン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、ジフェニルアミンなどが挙げられる。
複素環式アミンとしては、例えば、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、N-シクロヘキシル-N’-[2-(4-モルホリニル)エチル]チオ尿素、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンなどが挙げられる。
第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシドとしては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラ-n-ヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシドなどが挙げられる。
カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩としては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムアセテート、テトラメチルアンモニウムベンゾエート、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムアセテート、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムベンゾエートなどが挙げられる。
本発明に用いることができる塩基性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。 Specific examples of the aliphatic amine include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, and the like. Examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
Examples of the aromatic amine include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine and the like.
Examples of the heterocyclic amine include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, N-cyclohexyl-N ′-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0 ] -5-Nonene, 1,8-di And azabicyclo [5.3.0] -7-undecene and 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium hydroxide include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-hexylammonium hydroxide, and the like.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate and the like.
The basic compounds that can be used in the present invention may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、界面活性剤を含有してもよい。界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系、または、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン界面活性剤である。本発明の組成物に用いられる界面活性剤としては、例えば、特開2012-88459号公報の段落番号0201~0205に記載のものや、特開2011-215580号公報の段落番号0185~0188に記載のものを用いることができ、これらの記載は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
ノニオン系界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系、フッ素系界面活性剤を挙げることができる。また、以下商品名で、KP-341、X-22-822(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフローNo.99C(共栄社化学(株)製)、エフトップ(三菱マテリアル化成社製)、メガファック(DIC(株)製)、フロラードノベックFC-4430(住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-242(AGCセイミケミカル社製)、PolyFoxPF-6320(OMNOVA社製)、SH-8400(東レ・ダウコーニングシリコーン)、フタージェントFTX-218、FTX-218G(ネオス社製)等を挙げることができる。
また、界面活性剤として、下記一般式(I-1-1)で表される構成単位Aおよび構成単位Bを含み、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)を溶媒とした場合のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーで測定されるポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)が1,000以上10,000以下である共重合体を好ましい例として挙げることができる。 << Surfactant >>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic, or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant. Examples of the surfactant used in the composition of the present invention include those described in paragraph Nos. 0201 to 0205 in JP2012-88459A, and paragraphs 0185 to 0188 in JP2011-215580A. Can be used and these descriptions are incorporated herein.
Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. . The following trade names are KP-341, X-22-822 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow No. 99C (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), F Top (manufactured by Mitsubishi Materials Kasei Co., Ltd.), MegaFac (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Florard Novec FC-4430 (manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.), Surflon S-242 (Manufactured by AGC Seimi Chemical Co., Ltd.), PolyFox PF-6320 (manufactured by OMNOVA), SH-8400 (Toray Dow Corning Silicone), Footgent FTX-218, FTX-218G (manufactured by Neos), and the like.
Further, the surfactant is measured by gel permeation chromatography using the structural unit A and the structural unit B represented by the following general formula (I-1-1) and using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent. A preferred example is a copolymer having a polystyrene-reduced weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
これらの界面活性剤は、1種単独でまたは2種以上を混合して使用することができる。
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物が界面活性剤を含有する場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形成分100質量部に対し、10質量部以下であることが好ましく、0.001~10質量部であることがより好ましく、0.01~3質量部であることがさらに好ましい。界面活性剤は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種類以上の界面活性剤を用いる場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となる。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably from 1,500 to 5,000.
These surfactants can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
When the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably 10 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid components in the photosensitive resin composition. 0.001 to 10 parts by mass is more preferable, and 0.01 to 3 parts by mass is even more preferable. Surfactant may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. When using 2 or more types of surfactant, the total amount becomes the said range.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、感度向上を目的に、酸増殖剤を用いることができる。
本発明に用いることができる酸増殖剤は、酸触媒反応によってさらに酸を発生して反応系内の酸濃度を上昇させることができる化合物であり、酸が存在しない状態では安定に存在する化合物である。
このような酸増殖剤の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落番号0226~0228に記載の酸増殖剤が挙げられ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 << Acid Proliferator >>
In the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, an acid proliferating agent can be used for the purpose of improving sensitivity.
The acid proliferating agent that can be used in the present invention is a compound that can further generate an acid by an acid-catalyzed reaction to increase the acid concentration in the reaction system, and is a compound that exists stably in the absence of an acid. is there.
Specific examples of such an acid proliferating agent include the acid proliferating agents described in paragraph numbers 0226 to 0228 of JP2011-221494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、現像促進剤を含有することができる。
現像促進剤としては、特開2012-042837号公報の段落番号0171~0172に記載されているものを参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
現像促進剤は、1種を単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用することも可能である。
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物が現像促進剤を含有する場合、現像促進剤の含有量は、感度と残膜率の観点から、感光性樹脂組成物の全固形分100質量部に対し、0~30質量部が好ましく、0.1~20質量部がより好ましく、0.5~10質量部であることが最も好ましい。2種類以上の現像促進剤を用いる場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となる。 << Development accelerator >>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention can contain a development accelerator.
As the development accelerator, those described in paragraphs 0171 to 0172 of JP2012-042837A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
A development accelerator may be used individually by 1 type, and can also use 2 or more types together.
When the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention contains a development accelerator, the content of the development accelerator is 0 with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive resin composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and residual film ratio. Is preferably 30 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, and most preferably 0.5 to 10 parts by mass. When two or more types of development accelerators are used, the total amount is within the above range.
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物は、酸化防止剤を含有してもよい。酸化防止剤としては、公知の酸化防止剤を含有することができる。酸化防止剤を含有することにより、硬化膜の着色を防止できる、または、光や熱による分解による膜厚減少を低減でき、また、耐熱透明性に優れるという利点がある。
酸化防止剤としては、例えば、リン系酸化防止剤、アミド類、ヒドラジド類、イオウ系酸化防止剤、フェノール系酸化防止剤、アスコルビン酸類、硫酸亜鉛、糖類、亜硝酸塩、亜硫酸塩、チオ硫酸塩、ヒドロキシルアミン誘導体などを挙げることができる。これらの中では、光や熱による硬化膜の着色、膜厚減少の観点からフェノール系酸化防止剤、リン系酸化防止剤、イオウ系酸化防止剤が好ましく、フェノール系酸化防止剤がより好ましい。これらは1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上を混合してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、特に限定はされないが、光や熱による硬化膜の着色、膜厚減少の観点から、フェノール系酸化防止剤とイオウ系酸化防止剤の併用が好ましい。
好ましい市販品として、アデカスタブAO-15、アデカスタブAO-18、アデカスタブAO-20、アデカスタブAO-23、アデカスタブAO-30、アデカスタブAO-37、アデカスタブAO-40、アデカスタブAO-50、アデカスタブAO-51、アデカスタブAO-60、アデカスタブAO-70、アデカスタブAO-330、アデカスタブAO-412S、アデカスタブAO-503、アデカスタブPEP-4C、アデカスタブPEP-8、アデカスタブPEP-8W、アデカスタブPEP-24G、アデカスタブPEP-36、アデカスタブPEP-36Z、アデカスタブHP-10(以上、(株)ADEKA製)を挙げることができる。
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物が酸化防止剤を有する場合、酸化防止剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物の全固形成分100質量部に対し、0.1~10質量部であることが好ましく、0.2~5質量部であることがより好ましく、0.5~4質量部であることが特に好ましい。2種類以上の酸化防止剤を用いる場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となる。
また、その他の添加剤としては特開2012-8223号公報の段落番号0120~0121に記載の熱ラジカル発生剤、WO2011/136074A1に記載の窒素含有化合物および熱酸発生剤も用いることができ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 << Antioxidant >>
The photosensitive resin composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant. As an antioxidant, a well-known antioxidant can be contained. By containing the antioxidant, there is an advantage that coloring of the cured film can be prevented, or the film thickness reduction due to decomposition by light or heat can be reduced, and the heat-resistant transparency is excellent.
Examples of the antioxidant include phosphorus antioxidants, amides, hydrazides, sulfur antioxidants, phenolic antioxidants, ascorbic acids, zinc sulfate, saccharides, nitrites, sulfites, thiosulfates, Examples include hydroxylamine derivatives. Among these, a phenolic antioxidant, a phosphorus antioxidant, and a sulfur antioxidant are preferable, and a phenolic antioxidant is more preferable from the viewpoints of coloring the cured film by light and heat and reducing the film thickness. These may be used individually by 1 type and may mix 2 or more types. When two or more kinds are used in combination, there is no particular limitation, but from the viewpoint of coloring the cured film by light or heat and reducing the film thickness, the combined use of a phenol-based antioxidant and a sulfur-based antioxidant is preferable.
Preferred commercial products include ADK STAB AO-15, ADK STAB AO-18, ADK STAB AO-20, ADK STAB AO-23, ADK STAB AO-30, ADK STAB AO-37, ADK STAB AO-40, ADK STAB AO-50, ADK STAB AO-51, ADK STAB AO-60, ADK STAB AO-70, ADK STAB AO-330, ADK STAB AO-412S, ADK STAB AO-503, ADK STAB PEP-4C, ADK STAB PEP-8, ADK STAB PEP-8W, ADK STAB PEP-24G, ADK STAB PEP-36, Examples include ADK STAB PEP-36Z and ADK STAB HP-10 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
When the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention has an antioxidant, the content of the antioxidant is 0.1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid components of the photosensitive resin composition. The amount is preferably 0.2 to 5 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.5 to 4 parts by mass. When using 2 or more types of antioxidant, the total amount becomes the said range.
In addition, as other additives, thermal radical generators described in paragraphs 0120 to 0121 of JP2012-8223A, nitrogen-containing compounds and thermal acid generators described in WO2011-133604A1, can be used. Is incorporated herein by reference.
各成分を所定の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して感光性樹脂組成物を調製する。例えば、成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、これらを所定の割合で混合して樹脂組成物を調製することもできる。以上のように調製した組成物溶液は、孔径0.2μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。 <Method for preparing photosensitive resin composition>
Each component is mixed in a predetermined ratio and by any method, stirred and dissolved to prepare a photosensitive resin composition. For example, a resin composition can be prepared by preparing a solution in which components are dissolved in a solvent in advance and then mixing them in a predetermined ratio. The composition solution prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 μm or the like.
本発明の組成物の25℃における粘度は、1~100mPa・sが好ましく、2~60mPa・sがより好ましく、3~40mPa・sが最も好ましい。固形分濃度、粘度を上記範囲とすることで、高品位な塗布が可能となる。粘度は、例えば、東機産業製 粘度計 RE85L(ローター:1°34’×R24測定範囲0.6~1200mPa・s)を使用し、25℃に温度調製を施した状態で測定することができる。 The solid content concentration of the composition of the present invention at 25 ° C. is preferably 1 to 60% by mass, more preferably 3 to 40% by mass, further preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 5 to 17% by mass.
The viscosity at 25 ° C. of the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 100 mPa · s, more preferably 2 to 60 mPa · s, and most preferably 3 to 40 mPa · s. By setting the solid content concentration and viscosity within the above ranges, high-quality coating can be achieved. The viscosity can be measured, for example, using a viscometer RE85L (rotor: 1 ° 34 ′ × R24 measurement range 0.6 to 1200 mPa · s) manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd., with the temperature adjusted to 25 ° C. .
本発明の硬化膜の製造方法は、以下の(1)~(5)の工程を含むことが好ましい。
(1)本発明の感光性樹脂組成物を基板の少なくとも一方の面に塗布する工程、
(2)塗布された感光性樹脂組成物から溶剤を除去する工程、
(3)溶剤が除去された感光性樹脂組成物を活性光線により露光する工程、
(4)露光された感光性樹脂組成物を水性現像液により現像する工程、および
(5)現像された感光性樹脂組成物を熱硬化するポストベーク工程、
を含む硬化膜の製造方法。
以下に各工程を順に説明する。 (Method for producing cured film)
The method for producing a cured film of the present invention preferably includes the following steps (1) to (5).
(1) A step of applying the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention to at least one surface of a substrate,
(2) a step of removing the solvent from the applied photosensitive resin composition;
(3) A step of exposing the photosensitive resin composition from which the solvent has been removed with actinic rays,
(4) a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin composition with an aqueous developer, and (5) a post-baking step of thermosetting the developed photosensitive resin composition,
The manufacturing method of the cured film containing this.
Each step will be described below in order.
上記の基板としては、無機基板、樹脂、樹脂複合材料などが挙げられる。
無機基板としては、例えばガラス、石英、シリコーン、シリコンナイトライド、および、それらのような基板上にモリブデン、チタン、アルミ、銅などを蒸着した複合基板が挙げられる。
樹脂としては、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリブチレンナフタレート、ポリスチレン、ポリカーボネート、ポリスルホン、ポリエーテルスルホン、ポリアリレート、アリルジグリコールカーボネート、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリアミドイミド、ポリエーテルイミド、ポリベンズアゾール、ポリフェニレンサルファイド、ポリシクロオレフィン、ノルボルネン樹脂、ポリクロロトリフルオロエチレン等のフッ素樹脂、液晶ポリマー、アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、アイオノマー樹脂、シアネート樹脂、架橋フマル酸ジエステル、環状ポリオレフィン、芳香族エーテル、マレイミドーオレフィン、セルロース、エピスルフィド化合物等の合成樹脂からなる基板が挙げられる。
これらの基板は、上記の形態のまま用いられる場合は少なく、通常、最終製品の形態によって、例えばTFT素子のような多層積層構造が形成されている。
感光性樹脂組成物は、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、インクジェット塗布等の公知の塗布方法により、基板上に塗布することができる。中でもスリット塗布が好ましい。スリットコートは大型基板に効率よく塗布できるため、生産性が高い。大型基板とは、300000mm2以上12000000mm2以下の面積の基板をいう。スリット塗布する際には基板とスリットダイとの相対移動速度を20~180mm/secとすることが好ましい。なお、スリット塗布した後にスピン塗布を組み合わせることもできる。
塗布膜厚(乾燥膜厚)は特に限定されるものではなく、用途に応じた膜厚で塗布することができるが、通常は0.5~10μmの範囲で使用される。 In the application step (1), the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention is preferably applied onto a substrate to form a wet film containing a solvent. Before applying the photosensitive resin resin composition to the substrate, it is preferable to perform substrate cleaning such as alkali cleaning or plasma cleaning, and it is more preferable to treat the substrate surface with hexamethyldisilazane after substrate cleaning. By performing this treatment, the adhesiveness of the photosensitive resin composition to the substrate tends to be improved. The method for treating the substrate surface with hexamethyldisilazane is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method in which the substrate is exposed to hexamethyldisilazane vapor.
Examples of the substrate include inorganic substrates, resins, and resin composite materials.
Examples of the inorganic substrate include glass, quartz, silicone, silicon nitride, and a composite substrate in which molybdenum, titanium, aluminum, copper, or the like is vapor-deposited on such a substrate.
The resins include polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene naphthalate, polystyrene, polycarbonate, polysulfone, polyethersulfone, polyarylate, allyl diglycol carbonate, polyamide, polyimide, polyamideimide, polyetherimide, poly Fluorine resins such as benzazole, polyphenylene sulfide, polycycloolefin, norbornene resin, polychlorotrifluoroethylene, liquid crystal polymer, acrylic resin, epoxy resin, silicone resin, ionomer resin, cyanate resin, crosslinked fumaric acid diester, cyclic polyolefin, aromatic Made of synthetic resin such as aromatic ether, maleimide-olefin, cellulose, episulfide compound And the like.
These substrates are rarely used in the above-described form, and usually a multilayer laminated structure such as a TFT element is formed depending on the form of the final product.
The photosensitive resin composition can be applied onto the substrate by a known coating method such as slit coating, spin coating, or inkjet coating. Of these, slit coating is preferred. Since the slit coat can be efficiently applied to a large substrate, the productivity is high. And large-sized substrate refers to a substrate area of 300000Mm 2 more 12000000Mm 2 or less. When applying the slit, the relative movement speed of the substrate and the slit die is preferably 20 to 180 mm / sec. It is also possible to combine spin coating after slit coating.
The coating film thickness (dry film thickness) is not particularly limited, and can be applied with a film thickness according to the application, but is usually used in the range of 0.5 to 10 μm.
活性光線による露光光源としては、低圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、超高圧水銀灯、ケミカルランプ、LED光源、エキシマレーザー発生装置などを用いることができ、i線(365nm)、h線(405nm)、g線(436nm)などの波長300nm以上450nm以下の波長を有する活性光線が好ましく使用できる。また、必要に応じて長波長カットフィルター、短波長カットフィルター、バンドパスフィルターのような分光フィルターを通して照射光を調整することもできる。露光量は好ましくは1~500mJ/cm2である。
露光装置としては、ミラープロジェクションアライナー、ステッパー、スキャナー、プロキシミティ、コンタクト、マイクロレンズアレイ、レンズスキャナ、レーザー露光、液浸露光など各種方式の露光機を用いることができる。 In the exposure step (3), the substrate provided with the coating film is irradiated with an actinic ray having a predetermined pattern. In this step, the photoacid generator is decomposed to generate an acid. Due to the catalytic action of the generated acid, the acid-decomposable group contained in the coating film component is hydrolyzed to generate a carboxyl group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
As an exposure light source using actinic light, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh-pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, an LED light source, an excimer laser generator, and the like can be used, and i-line (365 nm), h-line (405 nm), Actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm to 450 nm, such as 436 nm), can be preferably used. Moreover, irradiation light can also be adjusted through spectral filters, such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a band pass filter, as needed. The exposure amount is preferably 1 to 500 mJ / cm 2 .
As the exposure apparatus, various types of exposure machines such as a mirror projection aligner, a stepper, a scanner, a proximity, a contact, a microlens array, a lens scanner, laser exposure, and immersion exposure can be used.
現像工程で使用する現像液には、塩基性化合物の水溶液が含まれることが好ましい。塩基性化合物としては、例えば、水酸化リチウム、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウムなどのアルカリ金属水酸化物類;炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム、炭酸セシウムなどのアルカリ金属炭酸塩類;重炭酸ナトリウム、重炭酸カリウムなどのアルカリ金属重炭酸塩類;テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジエチルジメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド等のテトラアルキルアンモニウムヒドロキシド類:コリン等の(ヒドロキシアルキル)トリアルキルアンモニウムヒドロキシド類;ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウムなどのケイ酸塩類;エチルアミン、プロピルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン等のアルキルアミン類;ジメチルエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン等のアルコールアミン類;1,8-ジアザビシクロ‐[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン、1,5-ジアザビシクロ-[4.3.0]-5-ノネン等の脂環式アミン類を使用することができる。
これらのうち、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン(2-ヒドロキシエチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド)が好ましい。
また、上記アルカリ類の水溶液にメタノールやエタノールなどの水溶性有機溶剤や界面活性剤を適当量添加した水溶液を現像液として使用することもできる。
現像液のpHは、好ましくは10.0~14.0である。
現像時間は、好ましくは30~500秒間であり、また、現像の手法は液盛り法(パドル法)、シャワー法、ディップ法等の何れでもよい。
現像の後に、リンス工程を行うこともできる。リンス工程では、現像後の基板を純水などで洗うことで、付着している現像液除去、現像残渣除去を行う。リンス方法は公知の方法を用いることができる。例えばシャワーリンスやディップリンスなどを挙げる事ができる。 In the developing step (4), a copolymer having a liberated carboxyl group or phenolic hydroxyl group is developed using an alkaline developer. A positive image is formed by removing an exposed area containing a resin composition having a carboxyl group or a phenolic hydroxyl group that is easily dissolved in an alkaline developer.
The developer used in the development step preferably contains an aqueous solution of a basic compound. Examples of basic compounds include alkali metal hydroxides such as lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, and potassium hydroxide; alkali metal carbonates such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, and cesium carbonate; sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate Alkali metal bicarbonates such as: tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, diethyldimethylammonium hydroxide, and other tetraalkylammonium hydroxides: Alkyl) trialkylammonium hydroxides; silicates such as sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate; ethylamine, propylamine, diethylamine, triethylammonium Alkylamines such as diamine; alcohol amines such as dimethylethanolamine and triethanolamine; 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene, 1,5-diazabicyclo- [4.3.0 ] Cycloaliphatic amines such as 5-nonene can be used.
Of these, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, and choline (2-hydroxyethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide) are preferable.
An aqueous solution obtained by adding an appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol or ethanol or a surfactant to the alkaline aqueous solution can also be used as a developer.
The pH of the developer is preferably 10.0 to 14.0.
The development time is preferably 30 to 500 seconds, and the development method may be any of a liquid piling method (paddle method), a shower method, a dipping method, and the like.
A rinsing step can also be performed after development. In the rinsing step, the developed substrate and the development residue are removed by washing the developed substrate with pure water or the like. A known method can be used as the rinsing method. For example, shower rinse and dip rinse can be mentioned.
ポストベークの前に、比較的低温でベークを行った後にポストベークすることもできる(ミドルベーク工程の追加)。ミドルベークを行う場合は、90~150℃で1~60分加熱した後に、200℃以上の高温でポストベークすることが好ましい。また、ミドルベーク、ポストベークを3段階以上の多段階に分けて加熱する事もできる。このようなミドルベーク、ポストベークの工夫により、パターンのテーパー角を調整することができる。これらの加熱は、ホットプレート、オーブン、赤外線ヒーターなど、公知の加熱方法を使用することができる。
なお、ポストベークに先立ち、パターンを形成した基板に活性光線により全面再露光(ポスト露光)した後、ポストベークすることにより未露光部分に存在する光酸発生剤から酸を発生させ、架橋工程を促進する触媒として機能させることができ、膜の硬化反応を促進することができる。ポスト露光工程を含む場合の好ましい露光量としては、100~3,000mJ/cm2が好ましく、100~500mJ/cm2が特に好ましい。 In the post-baking step of (5), the obtained positive image is heated to thermally decompose the acid-decomposable group to generate a carboxyl group or a phenolic hydroxyl group, to crosslink the crosslinkable group, the crosslinking agent, and the like. A cured film can be formed by promoting cyclized PBO. This heating is performed using a heating device such as a hot plate or an oven at a predetermined temperature, for example, 180 to 400 ° C. for a predetermined time, for example, 5 to 120 minutes on a hot plate, 30 to 360 minutes for an oven. It is preferable to By proceeding with the crosslinking reaction and the cyclization reaction in this way, a protective film and an interlayer insulating film that are superior in heat resistance, hardness and the like can be formed. In addition, when the heat treatment is performed in a nitrogen atmosphere, the transparency can be further improved.
Prior to post-baking, post-baking can be performed after baking at a relatively low temperature (addition of a middle baking process). When middle baking is performed, it is preferable to post-bake at a high temperature of 200 ° C. or higher after heating at 90 to 150 ° C. for 1 to 60 minutes. Moreover, middle baking and post-baking can be heated in three or more stages. The taper angle of the pattern can be adjusted by devising such middle baking and post baking. These heating methods can use well-known heating methods, such as a hotplate, oven, and an infrared heater.
Prior to post-baking, the entire surface of the patterned substrate was re-exposed with actinic rays (post-exposure), and then post-baked to generate an acid from the photoacid generator present in the unexposed portion, thereby performing a crosslinking step. It can function as a catalyst to promote, and can accelerate the curing reaction of the film. The preferred exposure amount in the case of including a post-exposure step, preferably 100 ~ 3,000mJ / cm 2, particularly preferably 100 ~ 500mJ / cm 2.
本発明の硬化膜は、上述した感光性樹脂組成物を硬化して得られた硬化膜である。
本発明の硬化膜は、層間絶縁膜として好適に用いることができる。また、本発明の硬化膜は、上述した本発明の硬化膜の形成方法により得られた硬化膜であることが好ましい。
本発明の感光性樹脂組成物により、絶縁性に優れ、高温でベークされた場合においても高い透明性を有する層間絶縁膜が得られる。本発明の感光性樹脂組成物を用いてなる層間絶縁膜は、高い透明性を有し、硬化膜物性に優れるため、液晶表示装置や有機EL表示装置の用途に有用である。 (Cured film)
The cured film of the present invention is a cured film obtained by curing the above-described photosensitive resin composition.
The cured film of the present invention can be suitably used as an interlayer insulating film. Moreover, it is preferable that the cured film of this invention is a cured film obtained by the formation method of the cured film of this invention mentioned above.
With the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, an interlayer insulating film having excellent insulation and high transparency even when baked at high temperatures can be obtained. Since the interlayer insulating film using the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention has high transparency and excellent cured film properties, it is useful for liquid crystal display devices and organic EL display devices.
本発明の液晶表示装置は、本発明の硬化膜を具備する。
本発明の液晶表示装置としては、上記本発明の感光性樹脂組成物を用いて形成される保護膜や平坦化膜や層間絶縁膜を有すること以外は特に制限されず、様々な構造をとる公知の液晶表示装置を挙げることができる。
例えば、本発明の液晶表示装置が具備するTFT(Thin-Film Transistor)の具体例としては、アモルファスシリコン-TFT、低温ポリシリコンーTFT、酸化物半導体TFT等が挙げられる。本発明の硬化膜は電気特性に優れるため、これらのTFTに組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
また、本発明の液晶表示装置が取りうる液晶駆動方式としてはTN(TwistedNematic)方式、VA(Virtical Alignment)方式、IPS(In-Place-Switching)方式、FFS(Frings Field Switching)方式、OCB(Optical Compensated Bend)方式などが挙げられる。
パネル構成においては、COA(Color Filter on Allay)方式の液晶表示装置でも本発明の硬化膜を用いることができ、例えば、特開2005-284291号公報の有機絶縁膜(115)や、特開2005-346054号公報の有機絶縁膜(212)として用いることができる。また、本発明の液晶表示装置が取りうる液晶配向膜の具体的な配向方式としてはラビング配向法、光配向方などが挙げられる。また、特開2003-149647号公報や特開2011-257734号公報に記載のPSA(Polymer Sustained Alignment)技術によってポリマー配向支持されていてもよい。
また、本発明の感光性樹脂組成物および本発明の硬化膜は、上記用途に限定されず種々の用途に使用することができる。例えば、カラーフィルターの保護膜や、液晶表示装置における液晶層の厚みを一定に保持するためのスペーサーや固体撮像素子においてカラーフィルター上に設けられるマイクロレンズ等に好適に用いることができる。
図1は、アクティブマトリックス方式の液晶表示装置10の一例を示す概念的断面図である。このカラー液晶表示装置10は、背面にバックライトユニット12を有する液晶パネルであって、液晶パネルは、偏光フィルムが貼り付けられた2枚のガラス基板14,15の間に配置されたすべての画素に対応するTFT16の素子が配置されている。ガラス基板上に形成された各素子には、硬化膜17中に形成されたコンタクトホール18を通して、画素電極を形成するITO透明電極19が配線されている。ITO透明電極19の上には、液晶20の層とブラックマトリックスを配置したRGBカラーフィルター22が設けられている。
バックライトの光源としては、特に限定されず公知の光源を用いることができる。例えば白色LED、青色・赤色・緑色などの多色LED、蛍光灯(冷陰極管)、有機ELなどを挙げる事ができる。
また、液晶表示装置は、3D(立体視)型のものとしたり、タッチパネル型のものとしたりすることも可能である。さらにフレキシブル型にすることも可能であり、特開2011-145686号公報に記載の第2層間絶縁膜(48)や、特開2009-258758号公報に記載の層間絶縁膜(520)として用いることができる。
さらに、スタティック駆動方式の液晶表示装置でも、本発明を適用することで意匠性の高いパターンを表示させることも可能である。例として、特開2001-125086号公報に記載されているようなポリマーネットワーク型液晶の絶縁膜として本発明を適用することができる。 (Liquid crystal display device)
The liquid crystal display device of the present invention comprises the cured film of the present invention.
The liquid crystal display device of the present invention is not particularly limited except that it has a protective film, a planarizing film, and an interlayer insulating film formed using the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, and is known in various structures. The liquid crystal display device can be mentioned.
For example, specific examples of TFT (Thin-Film Transistor) included in the liquid crystal display device of the present invention include amorphous silicon-TFT, low-temperature polysilicon-TFT, oxide semiconductor TFT, and the like. Since the cured film of the present invention is excellent in electrical characteristics, it can be preferably used in combination with these TFTs.
In addition, as a liquid crystal driving method that can be adopted by the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, a TN (Twisted Nematic) method, a VA (Virtual Alignment) method, an IPS (In-Place-Switching) method, an FFS (Frings Field Switching) method, an OCB (Optical) method. Compensated Bend) method and the like.
In the panel configuration, the cured film of the present invention can also be used in a COA (Color Filter on Array) type liquid crystal display device. For example, the organic insulating film (115) of JP-A-2005-284291, -346054 can be used as the organic insulating film (212). Specific examples of the alignment method of the liquid crystal alignment film that the liquid crystal display device of the present invention can take include a rubbing alignment method and a photo alignment method. Further, the polymer orientation may be supported by a PSA (Polymer Sustained Alignment) technique described in JP-A Nos. 2003-149647 and 2011-257734.
Moreover, the photosensitive resin composition of this invention and the cured film of this invention are not limited to the said use, It can be used for various uses. For example, it can be suitably used for a color filter protective film, a spacer for keeping the thickness of a liquid crystal layer in a liquid crystal display device constant, a microlens provided on a color filter in a solid-state imaging device, or the like.
FIG. 1 is a conceptual cross-sectional view showing an example of an active matrix liquid
The light source of the backlight is not particularly limited, and a known light source can be used. For example, a white LED, a multicolor LED such as blue, red, and green, a fluorescent lamp (cold cathode tube), and an organic EL can be used.
Further, the liquid crystal display device can be a 3D (stereoscopic) type or a touch panel type. Further, it can be made flexible, and used as the second interlayer insulating film (48) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-145686 and the interlayer insulating film (520) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-258758. Can do.
Further, even in a static drive type liquid crystal display device, a pattern with high designability can be displayed by applying the present invention. As an example, the present invention can be applied as an insulating film of a polymer network type liquid crystal as described in JP-A-2001-125086.
本発明の有機EL表示装置は、本発明の硬化膜を具備する。
本発明の有機EL表示装置としては、上記本発明の感光性樹脂組成物を用いて形成される平坦化膜や層間絶縁膜を有すること以外は特に制限されず、様々な構造をとる公知の各種有機EL表示装置や液晶表示装置を挙げることができる。
例えば、本発明の有機EL表示装置が具備するTFT(Thin-Film Transistor)の具体例としては、アモルファスシリコン-TFT、低温ポリシリコンーTFT、酸化物半導体TFT等が挙げられる。本発明の硬化膜は電気特性に優れるため、これらのTFTに組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
図2は、有機EL表示装置の一例の構成概念図である。ボトムエミッション型の有機EL表示装置における基板の模式的断面図を示し、平坦化膜4を有している。
ガラス基板6上にボトムゲート型のTFT1を形成し、このTFT1を覆う状態でSi3N4から成る絶縁膜3が形成されている。絶縁膜3に、ここでは図示を省略したコンタクトホールを形成した後、このコンタクトホールを介してTFT1に接続される配線2(高さ1.0μm)が絶縁膜3上に形成されている。配線2は、TFT1間または、後の工程で形成される有機EL素子とTFT1とを接続するためのものである。
さらに、配線2の形成による凹凸を平坦化するために、配線2による凹凸を埋め込む状態で絶縁膜3上に平坦化層4が形成されている。
平坦化膜4上には、ボトムエミッション型の有機EL素子が形成されている。すなわち、平坦化膜4上に、ITOからなる第一電極5が、コンタクトホール7を介して配線2に接続させて形成されている。また、第一電極5は、有機EL素子の陽極に相当する。
第一電極5の周縁を覆う形状の絶縁膜8が形成されており、この絶縁膜8を設けることによって、第一電極5とこの後の工程で形成する第二電極との間のショートを防止することができる。
さらに、図2には図示していないが、所望のパターンマスクを介して、正孔輸送層、有機発光層、電子輸送層を順次蒸着して設け、次いで、基板上方の全面にAlから成る第二電極を形成し、封止用ガラス板と紫外線硬化型エポキシ樹脂を用いて貼り合わせることで封止し、各有機EL素子にこれを駆動するためのTFT1が接続されてなるアクティブマトリックス型の有機EL表示装置が得られる。 (Organic EL display device)
The organic EL display device of the present invention includes the cured film of the present invention.
The organic EL display device of the present invention is not particularly limited except that it has a flattening film and an interlayer insulating film formed using the photosensitive resin composition of the present invention, and various known structures having various structures. Examples thereof include an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
For example, specific examples of TFT (Thin-Film Transistor) included in the organic EL display device of the present invention include amorphous silicon-TFT, low-temperature polysilicon-TFT, oxide semiconductor TFT, and the like. Since the cured film of the present invention is excellent in electrical characteristics, it can be preferably used in combination with these TFTs.
FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram of an example of an organic EL display device. A schematic cross-sectional view of a substrate in a bottom emission type organic EL display device is shown, and a
A bottom
Further, in order to flatten the unevenness due to the formation of the
On the
An insulating
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, a hole transport layer, an organic light emitting layer, and an electron transport layer are sequentially deposited through a desired pattern mask, and then a second layer made of Al is formed on the entire surface above the substrate. An active matrix organic material in which two electrodes are formed and sealed by bonding using a sealing glass plate and an ultraviolet curable epoxy resin, and each organic EL element is connected to a
温度計、攪拌器、窒素導入管を備えた3つ口フラスコに、293g(0.8mol)のヘキサフルオロ-2,2-ビス(3-アミノ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン(日本化薬(株)製)、158.2g(2.0mol)のピリジンおよび1.2kgのN-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)を添加した。これを室温で撹拌、次いでドライアイス/アセトンバスで-25℃まで冷却した。この溶液に、反応温度を-20℃~-30℃で維持しながら、73.9g(0.364mol)のイソフタロイルクロライド(東京化成(株)製)、107.4g(0.364mol)の4,4’-オキシビスベンゾイルクロライド(4,4’-オキシビス安息香酸(Aldrich製)を定法にて酸クロリドに変換して得た。)、NMP(1-メチル-2-ピロリドン)700gの混合溶液を滴下した。滴下が完了した後、得られる混合物を室温で16時間撹拌した。
次に、この反応液を氷/メタノールバスで-5℃以下まで冷却し、反応温度を-0℃以下で維持しながらアセチルクロライド17.0g(0.217mol)を滴下した。滴下が完了した後、さらに16時間撹拌した。
この反応液をアセトン2Lで希釈し、激しく攪拌した20Lの脱イオン水中に投入し、析出した白色粉体を濾過によって回収し、そして脱イオン水および水/メタノール(50/50質量比)混合物によって洗浄した。真空下でポリマーを40℃において24時間乾燥させ、樹脂A-1を得た。 Synthesis Example A-1: Synthesis of Resin A-1 In a three-necked flask equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, and a nitrogen introduction tube, 293 g (0.8 mol) of hexafluoro-2,2-bis (3-amino- 4-Hydroxyphenyl) propane (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), 158.2 g (2.0 mol) of pyridine and 1.2 kg of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) were added. This was stirred at room temperature and then cooled to −25 ° C. with a dry ice / acetone bath. To this solution, while maintaining the reaction temperature at −20 ° C. to −30 ° C., 73.9 g (0.364 mol) of isophthaloyl chloride (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 107.4 g (0.364 mol) of Mixing of 4,4′-oxybisbenzoyl chloride (obtained by converting 4,4′-oxybisbenzoic acid (manufactured by Aldrich) to acid chloride by a conventional method) and 700 g of NMP (1-methyl-2-pyrrolidone) The solution was added dropwise. After the addition was complete, the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours.
Next, the reaction solution was cooled to −5 ° C. or lower with an ice / methanol bath, and 17.0 g (0.217 mol) of acetyl chloride was added dropwise while maintaining the reaction temperature at −0 ° C. or lower. After completion of the dropwise addition, the mixture was further stirred for 16 hours.
The reaction solution is diluted with 2 L of acetone, poured into 20 L of deionized water with vigorous stirring, the precipitated white powder is recovered by filtration, and deionized water and a water / methanol (50/50 mass ratio) mixture. Washed. The polymer was dried under vacuum at 40 ° C. for 24 hours to obtain Resin A-1.
樹脂A-2~A-14についても樹脂A-1と同様の操作で合成を行った。これらの合成で使用した装置およびピリジン量、溶媒量、ポリマーの取り出し方法等はすべて合成例A-1と同等装置、同量の条件である。いずれも酸ジクロライドは全てを混合し、滴下液側に入れた。使用したモノマーの量および、得られたポリマーの分子量を以下の表に示す。 Synthesis Examples A-2 to A-14: Synthesis of Resins A-2 to 14 Resins A-2 to A-14 were synthesized in the same manner as Resin A-1. The apparatus used in these syntheses, the amount of pyridine, the amount of solvent, the method for taking out the polymer, etc. are all the same apparatus and conditions as in Synthesis Example A-1. In all cases, all of the acid dichloride was mixed and placed on the dropping liquid side. The amount of monomer used and the molecular weight of the resulting polymer are shown in the table below.
分子量(GPC)は、表中の数値×1000を表す。分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーのポリスチレン換算値をもって測定したMw値であり、表中の数値×1000を表す(以下、樹脂の分子量について同じ)。
A molecular weight (GPC) represents the numerical value x1000 in a table | surface. The molecular weight is an Mw value measured by gel permeation chromatography in terms of polystyrene, and represents a numerical value x 1000 in the table (hereinafter the same as the molecular weight of the resin).
3つ口フラスコに、合成例A-1で得られたポリマー(A-1)150g、およびプロピレングリコール-1-モノメチルエーテル-2-アセタート(PGMEA)を2.4L加え、内容物が1.35kgになるまで濃縮した。温度計、攪拌器、窒素導入管を使用し、カンファースルホン酸(3質量%PGMEA溶液)を17.4g(2.25mmol)、2,3-ジヒドロフラン12.99g(0.169mol)を加え、室温で4時間攪拌した。次に、トリエチルアミン(10質量%PGMEA溶液)5.68g(5.62mmol)を加えて反応を停止した。
この反応液をアセトン1.5Lで希釈し、激しく攪拌した20Lのヘキサン中に投入し、析出した白色粉体を濾過によって回収した。真空下でポリマーを40℃において4時間乾燥させ、このポリマーのうち120gを2Lのアセトンに溶解させ、激しく攪拌した10Lの水中に投入し、そして脱イオン水および水/メタノール(50/50質量比)混合物によって洗浄した。真空下でポリマーを40℃において24時間乾燥させ、樹脂A-101aを得た。 Synthesis Example A-101a: Synthesis of Resin A-101a In a three-necked flask, 150 g of the polymer (A-1) obtained in Synthesis Example A-1 and propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate (PGMEA) 2.4 L was added, and the contents were concentrated to 1.35 kg. Using a thermometer, a stirrer, and a nitrogen inlet tube, 17.4 g (2.25 mmol) of camphorsulfonic acid (3 mass% PGMEA solution) and 12.99 g (0.169 mol) of 2,3-dihydrofuran were added, Stir at room temperature for 4 hours. Next, 5.68 g (5.62 mmol) of triethylamine (10 mass% PGMEA solution) was added to stop the reaction.
The reaction solution was diluted with 1.5 L of acetone, poured into 20 L of hexane that was vigorously stirred, and the precipitated white powder was collected by filtration. The polymer was dried under vacuum at 40 ° C. for 4 hours, 120 g of this polymer was dissolved in 2 L acetone, poured into 10 L of vigorously stirred water, and deionized water and water / methanol (50/50 mass ratio) ) Washed with the mixture. The polymer was dried under vacuum at 40 ° C. for 24 hours to obtain Resin A-101a.
樹脂A-101b~A-114cについても樹脂A-101aと同様の操作で合成を行った。これらの合成で使用した装置、溶媒量、およびポリマーの取り出し方法等はすべて合成例A-101aと同等装置、同量の条件である。使用したモノマーの量および得られたポリマーの分子量を以下の表に示す。 Synthesis Examples A-101b to A-114c: Synthesis of Resins A-101b to A-114c Resins A-101b to A-114c were synthesized in the same manner as Resin A-101a. The equipment used in these syntheses, the amount of solvent, the method of taking out the polymer, etc. are all the same equipment and conditions as in Synthesis Example A-101a. The amount of monomer used and the molecular weight of the resulting polymer are shown in the table below.
合成例A-101aにおける2,3-ジヒドロフラン12.99gを、エチルビニルエーテル12.19g(0.169mol)に変更したほかは、合成例A-101aと同様の操作で反応及びポリマーの再沈、乾燥を行った。このときに得られたポリマーのOH基保護率は30%であり、分子量は6700であった。 Synthesis Example A-201a: Synthesis of Resin A-201a Synthesis Example A-101a except that 12.99 g of 2,3-dihydrofuran in Synthesis Example A-101a was changed to 12.19 g (0.169 mol) of ethyl vinyl ether. The reaction, polymer reprecipitation, and drying were performed in the same manner as described above. The polymer obtained at this time had an OH group protection rate of 30% and a molecular weight of 6,700.
合成例A-101aにおける2,3-ジヒドロフラン12.99gを、シクロヘキシルビニルエーテル21.3g(0.169mol)に変更したほかは、合成例A-101aと同様の操作で反応及びポリマーの再沈、乾燥を行った。このときに得られたポリマーのOH基保護率は30%であり、分子量は6800であった。 Synthesis Example A-301a: Synthesis of Resin A-301a Synthesis Example A-101a except that 12.99 g of 2,3-dihydrofuran in Synthesis Example A-101a was changed to 21.3 g (0.169 mol) of cyclohexyl vinyl ether. The reaction, polymer reprecipitation, and drying were performed in the same manner as described above. The polymer obtained at this time had an OH group protection rate of 30% and a molecular weight of 6,800.
下記表に記載の固形分比となるように各成分を秤量し、口径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過して、各種実施例および比較例の感光性樹脂組成物を得た。表中の特に単位を付していない数値は質量部である。 <Preparation of photosensitive resin composition>
Each component was weighed so as to have a solid content ratio described in the following table, and filtered through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a diameter of 0.2 μm to obtain photosensitive resin compositions of various examples and comparative examples. The numerical value which does not attach | subject especially the unit in a table | surface is a mass part.
B.光酸発生剤
B-1:下記に示す構造(PAG-103、BASF社製)、発生する酸のpKaは2以下
B. Photoacid generator B-1: structure shown below (PAG-103, manufactured by BASF), pKa of generated acid is 2 or less
GBL:ガンマブチロラクトン(三菱化学社製)
PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(昭和電工社製) C. Solvent GBL: Gamma butyrolactone (Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation)
PGMEA: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (Showa Denko)
D-1:下記に示す構造(JER828、三菱ケミカルホールディングス社製)
E-1:γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン
E-2:γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン Adhesion improver E-1: γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane E-2: γ-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane
H-1:下記構造の化合物
W-1:下記構造の化合物
W-1: Compound having the following structure
DBA:9,10- ブトキシアントラセン (Sensitizer)
DBA: 9,10-butoxyanthracene
乾燥窒素気流下、4つ口フラスコに11.0gのBAHF(0.03モル)と4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル4.0g(0.02モル)をアセトン30gとプロピレンオキシド58g(1.0モル)に溶解させ、-10℃に冷却した。ここに、無水トリメリット酸クロリド21.1g(0.1モル)をアセトン40gに溶解させた溶液を反応溶液の温度が0℃を超えないように徐々に滴下した。滴下終了後、1時間、-5℃以下で反応を行い、4,4’-ジアミノジフェニルエーテル9.0g(0.045モル)と1、3-ビス(3-アミノプロピル)テトラメチルジシロキサン1.24g(0.005モル)をN-メチルピロリドン(NMP)80gに溶解させた溶液を加えて、0℃で1時間反応させ、次いで30℃で4時間反応させた。
反応終了後、溶液を水10Lに投入してポリヒドロキシアミド酸の沈殿を生成させた。この沈殿をろ過で集めて、水で洗浄して50℃の真空乾燥機で20時間乾燥させて比較例のポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体PBO-1(架橋基を有さないPBO前駆体)を得た。 << Synthesis of benzoxazole precursor polymer (PBO-1) (polymer of Example 2 of JP 2000-39714 A) >>
Under a dry nitrogen stream, 11.0 g of BAHF (0.03 mol), 4.0 g (0.02 mol) of 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl ether, 30 g of acetone and 58 g of propylene oxide (1.0 mol) in a four-necked flask. ) And cooled to -10 ° C. A solution prepared by dissolving 21.1 g (0.1 mol) of trimellitic anhydride chloride in 40 g of acetone was gradually added dropwise so that the temperature of the reaction solution did not exceed 0 ° C. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction was carried out at −5 ° C. or lower for 1 hour, and 9.0 g (0.045 mol) of 4,4′-diaminodiphenyl ether and 1,3-bis (3-aminopropyl) tetramethyldisiloxane A solution prepared by dissolving 24 g (0.005 mol) in 80 g of N-methylpyrrolidone (NMP) was added and reacted at 0 ° C. for 1 hour and then at 30 ° C. for 4 hours.
After completion of the reaction, the solution was poured into 10 L of water to form a polyhydroxyamic acid precipitate. The precipitate was collected by filtration, washed with water and dried in a vacuum dryer at 50 ° C. for 20 hours to obtain a comparative polybenzoxazole precursor PBO-1 (PBO precursor having no crosslinking group). .
メタクリル酸1-エトキシエチル 66部、GMA 50部、メタクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル 20部、およびPGMEA 132.5部の混合溶液を窒素気流下、70℃に加熱した。この混合溶液を撹拌しながら、ラジカル重合開始剤V-65(和光純薬工業(株)製、12.4部)、およびPGMEA 100.0部の混合溶液に2.5時間かけて滴下した。滴下が終了してから、70℃で4時間反応させることによりアクリル系重合体を合成した。定法に従って再沈殿し、粉末として得た。 << Synthesis of acrylic polymer >>
A mixed solution of 66 parts of 1-ethoxyethyl methacrylate, 50 parts of GMA, 20 parts of 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate and 132.5 parts of PGMEA was heated to 70 ° C. in a nitrogen stream. While stirring this mixed solution, it was added dropwise over 2.5 hours to a mixed solution of radical polymerization initiator V-65 (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., 12.4 parts) and 100.0 parts of PGMEA. After completion of the dropping, an acrylic polymer was synthesized by reacting at 70 ° C. for 4 hours. Reprecipitation was performed according to a conventional method to obtain a powder.
2-ナフトール(10g)、クロロベンゼン(30mL)の懸濁溶液に塩化アルミニウム(10.6g)、2-クロロプロピオニルクロリド(10.1g)を添加し、混合液を40℃に加熱して2時間反応させた。氷冷下、反応液に4NHCl水溶液(60mL)を滴下し、酢酸エチル(50mL)を添加して分液した。有機層に炭酸カリウム(19.2g)を加え、40℃で1時間反応させた後、2NHCl水溶液(60mL)を添加して分液し、有機層を濃縮後、結晶をジイソプロピルエーテル(10mL)でリスラリーし、ろ過、乾燥してケトン化合物(6.5g)を得た。
得られたケトン化合物(3.0g)、メタノール(30mL)の懸濁溶液に酢酸(7.3g)、50質量%ヒドロキシルアミン水溶液(8.0g)を添加し、加熱還流した。放冷後、水(50mL)を加え、析出した結晶をろ過、冷メタノール洗浄後、乾燥してオキシム化合物(2.4g)を得た。
得られたオキシム化合物(1.8g)をアセトン(20mL)に溶解させ、氷冷下トリエチルアミン(1.5g)、p-トルエンスルホニルクロリド(2.4g)を添加し、室温に昇温して1時間反応させた。反応液に水(50mL)を添加し、析出した結晶をろ過後、メタノール(20mL)でリスラリーし、ろ過、乾燥してB-3(2.3g)を得た。
なお、B-3の1H-NMRスペクトル(300MHz、CDCl3)は、δ=8.3(d,1H),8.0(d,2H),7.9(d,1H),7.8(d,1H),7.6(dd,1H),7.4(dd,1H)7.3(d,2H),7.1(d.1H),5.6(q,1H),2.4(s,3H),1.7(d,3H)であった。 << Synthesis of B-3 >>
Aluminum chloride (10.6 g) and 2-chloropropionyl chloride (10.1 g) were added to a suspension of 2-naphthol (10 g) and chlorobenzene (30 mL), and the mixture was heated to 40 ° C. for 2 hours. I let you. Under ice-cooling, 4N HCl aqueous solution (60 mL) was added dropwise to the reaction solution, and ethyl acetate (50 mL) was added for liquid separation. Potassium carbonate (19.2 g) was added to the organic layer, reacted at 40 ° C. for 1 hour, 2N HCl aqueous solution (60 mL) was added and separated, and the organic layer was concentrated, and the crystals were diluted with diisopropyl ether (10 mL). The slurry was reslurried, filtered and dried to obtain a ketone compound (6.5 g).
Acetic acid (7.3 g) and a 50 mass% aqueous hydroxylamine solution (8.0 g) were added to a suspension of the obtained ketone compound (3.0 g) and methanol (30 mL), and the mixture was heated to reflux. After allowing to cool, water (50 mL) was added, and the precipitated crystals were filtered, washed with cold methanol, and dried to obtain an oxime compound (2.4 g).
The obtained oxime compound (1.8 g) was dissolved in acetone (20 mL), triethylamine (1.5 g) and p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (2.4 g) were added under ice cooling, and the temperature was raised to room temperature. Reacted for hours. Water (50 mL) was added to the reaction solution, and the precipitated crystals were filtered, reslurried with methanol (20 mL), filtered and dried to obtain B-3 (2.3 g).
The 1 H-NMR spectrum (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) of B-3 is δ = 8.3 (d, 1H), 8.0 (d, 2H), 7.9 (d, 1H), 7. 8 (d, 1H), 7.6 (dd, 1H), 7.4 (dd, 1H) 7.3 (d, 2H), 7.1 (d.1H), 5.6 (q, 1H) , 2.4 (s, 3H), 1.7 (d, 3H).
1-アミノ-2-ナフトール塩酸塩(東京化成製)4.0gをN-メチルピロリドン(和光純薬精)16gに懸濁させ、炭酸水素ナトリウム(和光純薬製)3.4gを添加後、4,4-ジメチル-3-オキソ吉草酸メチル(和光純薬製)4.9gを滴下し、窒素雰囲気下120℃で2時間加熱した。放冷後、反応混合液に水、酢酸エチルを添加して分液し、有機相を硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥し、ろ過、濃縮して粗B-1-2Aを得た。粗B-1-2Aをシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィー精製して、中間体B-1-2Aを1.7g得た。
B-1-2A(1.7g)とp-キシレン(6mL)を混合し、p-トルエンスルホン酸一水和物(和光純薬製)0.23gを添加して140℃で2時間加熱した。放冷後、反応混合液に水、酢酸エチルを添加して分液し、有機相を硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥後、ろ過、濃縮して粗B-1-2Bを得た。
THF(2mL)と粗B-1-2B全量を混合し、氷冷下2M塩酸/THF溶液6.0mL、次いで亜硝酸イソペンチル(和光純薬製)(0.84g)を滴下し、室温まで昇温後2時間攪拌した。得られた反応混合物に水、酢酸エチルを添加して分液し、有機層を水で洗浄後、硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥し、ろ過、濃縮して中間体粗B-1-2Cを得た。
中間体粗B-1-2C全量をアセトン(10mL)と混合し、氷冷下でトリエチルアミン(和光純薬製)(1.2g)、p-トルエンスルホニルクロリド(東京化成製)(1.4g)を添加後、室温まで昇温して1時間攪拌した。得られた反応混合液に水、酢酸エチルを添加して分液し、有機相を硫酸マグネシウムで乾燥後、ろ過、濃縮して粗B-4を得た。粗B-4を冷メタノールでリスラリー後、ろ過、乾燥してB-4(1.2g)を得た。
なお、B-4の1H-NMRスペクトル(300MHz、CDCl3)は、δ=8.5-8.4(m,1H),8.0-7.9(m,4H),7.7-7.6(m,2H),7.6-7.5(m,1H),7.4(d.2H),2.4(s,3H),1.4(s,9H)であった。 << Synthesis of B-4 >>
After 4.0 g of 1-amino-2-naphthol hydrochloride (manufactured by Tokyo Kasei) is suspended in 16 g of N-methylpyrrolidone (Wako Pure Chemical Industries), 3.4 g of sodium hydrogen carbonate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries) is added, 4.9 g of
B-1-2A (1.7 g) and p-xylene (6 mL) were mixed, 0.23 g of p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added and heated at 140 ° C. for 2 hours. . After allowing to cool, water and ethyl acetate were added to the reaction mixture and the phases were separated. The organic phase was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to give crude B-1-2B.
THF (2 mL) and the entire amount of crude B-1-2B were mixed, and 2 mL hydrochloric acid / THF solution 6.0 mL was added dropwise under ice cooling, and then isopentyl nitrite (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (0.84 g) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours after warming. Water and ethyl acetate were added to the obtained reaction mixture for liquid separation, and the organic layer was washed with water, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to obtain Intermediate Intermediate B-1-2C.
The whole amount of intermediate crude B-1-2C was mixed with acetone (10 mL), and triethylamine (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (1.2 g) and p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (Tokyo Kasei Co., Ltd.) (1.4 g) were cooled with ice. Then, the mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 1 hour. Water and ethyl acetate were added to the obtained reaction mixture to separate it, and the organic phase was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to obtain crude B-4. Crude B-4 was reslurried with cold methanol, filtered and dried to obtain B-4 (1.2 g).
The 1 H-NMR spectrum (300 MHz, CDCl 3 ) of B-4 is δ = 8.5-8.4 (m, 1H), 8.0-7.9 (m, 4H), 7.7. -7.6 (m, 2H), 7.6-7.5 (m, 1H), 7.4 (d. 2H), 2.4 (s, 3H), 1.4 (s, 9H) there were.
攪拌器および温度計を装着したセパラブルフラスコにN―ヒドロキシナフタルイミドナトリウム塩 33.6g、4―ジメチルアミノピリジンを0.72g、テトラヒドロフランを300ml入れ、室温25℃下で攪拌し溶解させた。次いで、(+)10―カンファースルホニルクロライド(42g)を加えて3時間攪拌した後、トリエチルアミン15gを加え、室温下で10時間攪拌した。次いで、蒸留水300ml中に反応溶液を入れ、析出した沈殿をろ別した。この沈殿をアセトンとヘキサンを用いて再沈殿処理を数回繰り返し、N―カンファースルホニルオキシ-1,8-ナフタルイミド(12g)を得た。 << Synthesis of B-5 >>
A separable flask equipped with a stirrer and a thermometer was charged with 33.6 g of N-hydroxynaphthalimide sodium salt, 0.72 g of 4-dimethylaminopyridine and 300 ml of tetrahydrofuran, and the mixture was stirred and dissolved at room temperature of 25 ° C. Next, (+) 10-camphorsulfonyl chloride (42 g) was added and stirred for 3 hours, and then 15 g of triethylamine was added and stirred at room temperature for 10 hours. Subsequently, the reaction solution was put into 300 ml of distilled water, and the deposited precipitate was separated by filtration. This precipitation was repeated several times with acetone and hexane to obtain N-camphorsulfonyloxy-1,8-naphthalimide (12 g).
調合した組成物を東機産業製 粘度計 RE85L(ローター:1°34’×R24測定範囲0.6~1200mPa・s)を使用し、25℃に温度調整を施した状態で粘度を測定した。
A:2mPa・s未満
B:2mPa・s以上15mPa・s未満
C:15mPa・s以上30mPa・s未満
D:30mPa・s以上 <Evaluation of viscosity>
Using the prepared composition, a viscometer RE85L (rotor: 1 ° 34 ′ × R24 measurement range 0.6 to 1200 mPa · s) manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd. was used, and the viscosity was measured with the temperature adjusted to 25 ° C.
A: Less than 2 mPa · s B: 2 mPa · s or more and less than 15 mPa · s C: 15 mPa · s or more and less than 30 mPa · s D: 30 mPa · s or more
各実施例・比較例で用いた架橋剤2質量部と、マルカリンカーM(丸善石油製、数平均分子量1500)2質量部とをTHF100質量部に溶解させた。 <Reactivity evaluation of crosslinking agent>
2 parts by mass of the crosslinking agent used in each Example / Comparative Example and 2 parts by mass of Marcalinker M (manufactured by Maruzen Petroleum, number average molecular weight 1500) were dissolved in 100 parts by mass of THF.
この溶解液をGPC分析したところ、2つのピーク(架橋剤のピークとフェノールのピーク)が観察されることを確認した。また、マルカリンカーのリテンションタイムを記録した。 Confirmation before heating When this solution was subjected to GPC analysis, it was confirmed that two peaks (crosslinker peak and phenol peak) were observed. In addition, the retention time of Marcalinker was recorded.
溶解液をガラス基板にスリット塗布した後、バキュームドライで溶剤を揮発させた後、90℃/120秒ホットプレート上でプリベークし、膜厚2.0μmの樹脂層を形成した。このガラス基板をオーブン中200℃で30分加熱した。加熱後の膜を0.1質量部削り取ってPGMEA10質量部を加え、同様にGPC分析した。
この分析で検出されるポリマーピークが最初のマルカリンカーMのリテンションタイムからずれている場合をA、ずれていない場合をBとした。
Aの場合、マルカリンカーMのベンゼン環またはフェノール性水酸基と、架橋剤とが反応した。結果、より分子量の大きいポリマーになったことを意味する。
Bの場合、マルカリンカーMのベンゼン環またはフェノール性水酸基と、架橋剤とが反応しなかったことを意味する。 Evaluation of reactivity The solution was slit-coated on a glass substrate, the solvent was volatilized by vacuum drying, and then prebaked on a hot plate at 90 ° C. for 120 seconds to form a resin layer having a thickness of 2.0 μm. This glass substrate was heated in an oven at 200 ° C. for 30 minutes. 0.1 mass parts of the heated film was scraped off, 10 mass parts of PGMEA was added, and GPC analysis was performed in the same manner.
The case where the polymer peak detected by this analysis deviates from the retention time of the first markalinker M is A, and the case where it does not deviate is B.
In the case of A, the benzene ring or phenolic hydroxyl group of Marca Linker M and the crosslinking agent reacted. As a result, it means that the polymer has a higher molecular weight.
In the case of B, it means that the benzene ring or phenolic hydroxyl group of Marcalinker M did not react with the crosslinking agent.
ガラス基板(OA-10(日本電気硝子社製))を、ヘキサメチルジシラザン(HMDS)蒸気下に30秒曝し、各感光性樹脂組成物をスリット塗布した後、バキュームドライで溶剤を揮発させた後、120℃/120秒ホットプレート上でプリベークし、膜厚2.0μmの感光性樹脂組成物層を形成した。
次に、得られた感光性樹脂組成物層を、キヤノン(株)製 MPA 5500CFを用いて、所定のマスクを介して露光した。露光後、80℃のホットプレート上で60秒加熱した感光性樹脂組成物層を、アルカリ現像液(2.38%のテトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド水溶液)で23℃/80秒間現像した後、超純水で20秒リンスした。これらの操作により5μmのホールを解像する時の最適i線露光量(Eopt)を感度とした。AおよびBが実用レベルである。
A:100mJ/cm2未満
B:100mJ/cm2以上、200mJ/cm2未満
C:200mJ/cm2以上、400mJ/cm2未満
D:400mJ/cm2以上 <Evaluation of sensitivity>
A glass substrate (OA-10 (manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd.)) was exposed to hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) vapor for 30 seconds, and each photosensitive resin composition was slit coated, and then the solvent was volatilized by vacuum drying. Then, it prebaked on a 120 degreeC / 120 second hotplate, and formed the photosensitive resin composition layer with a film thickness of 2.0 micrometers.
Next, the obtained photosensitive resin composition layer was exposed through a predetermined mask using MPA 5500CF manufactured by Canon Inc. After the exposure, the photosensitive resin composition layer heated on an 80 ° C. hot plate for 60 seconds was developed with an alkali developer (2.38% tetramethylammonium hydroxide aqueous solution) at 23 ° C./80 seconds, and then ultrapure. Rinse with water for 20 seconds. The optimum i-line exposure (Eopt) when resolving a 5 μm hole by these operations was taken as the sensitivity. A and B are practical levels.
A: Less than 100 mJ / cm 2 B: 100 mJ / cm 2 or more, less than 200 mJ / cm 2 C: 200 mJ / cm 2 or more, less than 400 mJ / cm 2 D: 400 mJ / cm 2 or more
ガラス基板(OA-10(日本電気硝子社製))を、ヘキサメチルジシラザン(HMDS)蒸気下に30秒曝し、各感光性樹脂組成物をスリット塗布した後、バキュームドライで溶剤を揮発させた後、120℃/120秒ホットプレート上でプリベークし、膜厚2.0μmの感光性樹脂組成物層を形成した。続いて超高圧水銀灯を用いて積算照射量が300mJ/cm2(エネルギー強度:20mW/cm2)となるように露光し、この基板をオーブンにて窒素雰囲気下で300℃/60分間加熱した。この硬化膜の透過率を、分光光度計(U-3000:(株)日立製作所製)を用いて、波長400nmで測定した。単位は%で示した。A、BおよびCが実用レベルである。
A:95%以上
B:90%以上95%未満
C:85%以上90%未満
D:85%未満 <Evaluation of transmittance>
A glass substrate (OA-10 (manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd.)) was exposed to hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) vapor for 30 seconds, and each photosensitive resin composition was slit coated, and then the solvent was volatilized by vacuum drying. Then, it prebaked on a 120 degreeC / 120 second hotplate, and formed the photosensitive resin composition layer with a film thickness of 2.0 micrometers. Subsequently, exposure was performed using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp so that the integrated irradiation amount was 300 mJ / cm 2 (energy intensity: 20 mW / cm 2 ), and the substrate was heated in an oven at 300 ° C./60 minutes in a nitrogen atmosphere. The transmittance of the cured film was measured at a wavelength of 400 nm using a spectrophotometer (U-3000: manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.). The unit is expressed in%. A, B and C are practical levels.
A: 95% or more B: 90% or more and less than 95% C: 85% or more and less than 90% D: Less than 85%
ガラス基板をヘキサメチルジシラザン(HMDS)蒸気下に30秒曝した。各感光性樹脂組成物をスピンコート塗布した後、120℃/120秒ホットプレート上でプリベークして溶剤を揮発させ、膜厚2.0μmの感光性樹脂組成物層を形成した。続いて超高圧水銀灯を用いて積算照射量が300mJ/cm2(エネルギー強度:20mW/cm2)となるように露光し、その後、この基板をオーブンにて窒素雰囲気下で300℃/60分加熱して硬化膜を得た。
次に、硬化後の膜を削りとり、室温から20℃/分で300℃まで昇温した後、300℃で60分保持し、熱重量減少量を評価した。評価は窒素雰囲気下で実施した。その結果を下記表に示した。数値としては小さいほど耐熱性が高く、AまたはBが実用レベルである。
A:重量減少率3%未満
B:重量減少率3%以上5%未満
C:重量減少率5%以上10%未満
D:重量減少率10%以上 <Heat resistance>
The glass substrate was exposed to hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) vapor for 30 seconds. Each photosensitive resin composition was spin-coated and then pre-baked on a hot plate at 120 ° C. for 120 seconds to volatilize the solvent to form a photosensitive resin composition layer having a thickness of 2.0 μm. Subsequently, exposure is performed using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp so that the integrated irradiation amount is 300 mJ / cm 2 (energy intensity: 20 mW / cm 2 ), and then the substrate is heated in an oven at 300 ° C./60 minutes in a nitrogen atmosphere. Thus, a cured film was obtained.
Next, the cured film was scraped off, heated from room temperature to 300 ° C. at 20 ° C./min, and held at 300 ° C. for 60 minutes, and the thermal weight loss was evaluated. Evaluation was carried out in a nitrogen atmosphere. The results are shown in the following table. The smaller the numerical value, the higher the heat resistance, and A or B is a practical level.
A: Weight reduction rate of less than 3% B: Weight reduction rate of 3% or more and less than 5% C: Weight reduction rate of 5% or more and less than 10% D: Weight reduction rate of 10% or more
Mo(モリブデン)薄膜が成膜されたガラス基板をヘキサメチルジシラザン(HMDS)蒸気下に30秒曝した。各感光性樹脂組成物をスピンコート塗布した後、120℃/120秒ホットプレート上でプリベークして溶剤を揮発させ、膜厚2.0μmの感光性樹脂組成物層を形成した。続いて超高圧水銀灯を用いて積算照射量が300mJ/cm2(エネルギー強度:20mW/cm2)となるように露光し、その後、この基板をオーブンにて窒素雰囲気下で300℃/60分加熱して硬化膜を得た。この硬化膜が形成された基板を80℃に温度制御されたN-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)に30分間浸漬させた。
浸漬後、硬化膜にカッターを用いて、縦横に1mmの間隔で切り込みを入れ、スコッチテープを用いてテープ剥離試験(100マスクロスカット法:JIS5600に準拠)を行った。テープ裏面に転写された硬化膜の面積から硬化膜と基板間の密着性を評価した。その結果を下記表に示した。数値としては小さいほど下地基板との密着性が高く、AまたはBが実用レベルである。
A:転写された面積が10%未満
B:転写された面積が10%以上50%未満
C:転写された面積が50%以上 <Curing film adhesion>
The glass substrate on which the Mo (molybdenum) thin film was formed was exposed to hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) vapor for 30 seconds. Each photosensitive resin composition was spin-coated and then pre-baked on a hot plate at 120 ° C. for 120 seconds to volatilize the solvent to form a photosensitive resin composition layer having a thickness of 2.0 μm. Subsequently, exposure is performed using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp so that the integrated irradiation amount is 300 mJ / cm 2 (energy intensity: 20 mW / cm 2 ), and then the substrate is heated in an oven at 300 ° C./60 minutes in a nitrogen atmosphere. Thus, a cured film was obtained. The substrate on which this cured film was formed was immersed in N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) whose temperature was controlled at 80 ° C. for 30 minutes.
After immersion, the cured film was cut using a cutter at intervals of 1 mm vertically and horizontally, and a tape peeling test (100 mask loss cut method: conforming to JIS 5600) was performed using a scotch tape. The adhesion between the cured film and the substrate was evaluated from the area of the cured film transferred to the back surface of the tape. The results are shown in the following table. The smaller the numerical value, the higher the adhesion to the base substrate, and A or B is a practical level.
A: The transferred area is less than 10% B: The transferred area is 10% or more and less than 50% C: The transferred area is 50% or more
さらに、実施例1~実施例109の感光性樹脂組成物について、上記感度の評価において露光を以下のように変更した以外は上記感度の評価と同様にして、パターン形成を行った。即ち、塗膜から150μmの間隔を介して、所定のフォトマスクをセットし、波長355nmのレーザを照射した。尚、レーザ装置は、株式会社ブイテクノロジー社製の「AEGIS」を使用した(波長355nm、パルス幅6nsec)。
いずれの実施例においても、MPA5500CFと同様にパターン形成可能であることがわかった。 (355nm laser exposure)
Furthermore, the photosensitive resin compositions of Examples 1 to 109 were subjected to pattern formation in the same manner as the sensitivity evaluation except that the exposure was changed as follows in the sensitivity evaluation. That is, a predetermined photomask was set through a 150 μm interval from the coating film, and a laser having a wavelength of 355 nm was irradiated. The laser device used was “AEGIS” manufactured by Buoy Technology Co., Ltd. (wavelength 355 nm,
In any of the examples, it was found that the pattern could be formed in the same manner as MPA5500CF.
さらに、実施例1~実施例109の感光性樹脂組成物について、露光をUV-LED光源露光機に変更した以外は、上記感度の評価(PEB無し)と同様の評価を実施したところ、いずれも同様にパターン形成可能であることが分かった。 (UV-LED exposure)
Further, the photosensitive resin compositions of Examples 1 to 109 were evaluated in the same manner as the sensitivity evaluation (without PEB) except that the exposure was changed to a UV-LED light source exposure machine. Similarly, it was found that pattern formation was possible.
薄膜トランジスタ(TFT)を用いた有機EL表示装置を以下の方法で作製した(図1参照)。
ガラス基板6上にボトムゲート型のTFT1を形成し、このTFT1を覆う状態でSi3N4から成る絶縁膜3を形成した。次に、この絶縁膜3に、コンタクトホールを形成した後、このコンタクトホールを介してTFT1に接続される配線2(高さ1.0μm)を絶縁膜3上に形成した。 (Example 200)
An organic EL display device using a thin film transistor (TFT) was produced by the following method (see FIG. 1).
A bottom
実施例2の感光性樹脂組成物を実施例46の感光性樹脂組成物に変更した以外は、実施例200と同様にして有機EL表示装置を作製した。得られた有機EL表示装置は、極めて良好な表示特性を示し、信頼性の高い有機EL表示装置であることが分かった。 (Example 201)
An organic EL display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 200 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 46. The obtained organic EL display device showed very good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable organic EL display device.
実施例2の感光性樹脂組成物を実施例91の感光性樹脂組成物に変更した以外は、実施例200と同様にして有機EL表示装置を作製した。得られた有機EL表示装置は、良好な表示特性を示し、信頼性の高い有機EL表示装置であることが分かった。 (Example 202)
An organic EL display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 200 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 91. The obtained organic EL display device showed good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable organic EL display device.
実施例2の感光性樹脂組成物を実施例97の感光性樹脂組成物に変更した以外は、実施例200と同様にして有機EL表示装置を作製した。得られた有機EL表示装置は、良好な表示特性を示し、信頼性の高い有機EL表示装置であることが分かった。 (Example 203)
An organic EL display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 200 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 97. The obtained organic EL display device showed good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable organic EL display device.
特許第3321003号公報の図1および図2に記載のアクティブマトリクス型液晶表示装置において、層間絶縁膜として硬化膜17を以下のようにして形成し、実施例204の液晶表示装置を得た。
すなわち、実施例2の感光性樹脂組成物を用い、上記実施例200における有機EL表示装置の平坦化膜4の形成方法と同様の方法で、層間絶縁膜として硬化膜17を形成した。 (Example 204)
In the active matrix type liquid crystal display device shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 of Japanese Patent No. 3312003, a cured
That is, using the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2, the cured
実施例2の感光性樹脂組成物を実施例46の感光性樹脂組成物に変更した以外は、実施例204と同様にして液晶表示装置を作製した。得られた液晶表示装置は、極めて良好な表示特性を示し、信頼性の高い液晶表示装置であることが分かった。 (Example 205)
A liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 204 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 46. The obtained liquid crystal display device showed very good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable liquid crystal display device.
実施例2の感光性樹脂組成物を実施例91の感光性樹脂組成物に変更した以外は、実施例204と同様にして液晶表示装置を作製した。得られた液晶表示装置は、良好な表示特性を示し、信頼性の高い液晶表示装置であることが分かった。 (Example 206)
A liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 204 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 91. The obtained liquid crystal display device showed good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable liquid crystal display device.
実施例2の感光性樹脂組成物を実施例97の感光性樹脂組成物に変更した以外は、実施例204と同様にして液晶表示装置を作製した。得られた液晶表示装置は、良好な表示特性を示し、信頼性の高い液晶表示装置であることが分かった。 (Example 207)
A liquid crystal display device was produced in the same manner as in Example 204 except that the photosensitive resin composition of Example 2 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition of Example 97. The obtained liquid crystal display device showed good display characteristics and was found to be a highly reliable liquid crystal display device.
2:配線
3:絶縁膜
4:平坦化膜
5:第一電極
6:ガラス基板
7:コンタクトホール
8:絶縁膜
10:液晶表示装置
12:バックライトユニット
14,15:ガラス基板
16:TFT
17:硬化膜
18:コンタクトホール
19:ITO透明電極
20:液晶
22:カラーフィルター 1: TFT (Thin Film Transistor)
2: Wiring 3: Insulating film 4: Flattened film 5: First electrode 6: Glass substrate 7: Contact hole 8: Insulating film 10: Liquid crystal display device 12:
17: Cured film 18: Contact hole 19: ITO transparent electrode 20: Liquid crystal 22: Color filter
Claims (15)
- 一般式(1)で表される繰り返し単位を含むポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体と、
発生する酸のpKaが4以下である光酸発生剤と、
溶剤と、
ベンゼン環およびフェノール性水酸基から選ばれる少なくとも1種と反応する架橋性基を2つ以上有する架橋剤と、を含有する感光性樹脂組成物;
一般式(1)
A photoacid generator in which the generated acid has a pKa of 4 or less;
Solvent,
A photosensitive resin composition comprising: a crosslinking agent having two or more crosslinking groups that react with at least one selected from a benzene ring and a phenolic hydroxyl group;
General formula (1)
- 前記架橋剤が有する架橋性基が、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基およびブロックイソシアネート基から選択される、請求項1に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition of Claim 1 in which the crosslinkable group which the said crosslinking agent has is selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group.
- 前記ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体の末端が、一般式(1-1)で表される基である、請求項1または2に記載の感光性樹脂組成物;
一般式(1-1)
General formula (1-1)
- 前記ポリベンゾオキサゾール前駆体が、m個の一般式(1-2)で表される繰り返し単位とn個の一般式(3)で表される繰り返し単位を含み、mは3~1000を表し、nは0~1000を表し、m+nは3~1000である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物;
一般式(1-2)
Formula (1-2)
- さらに密着促進剤を含有する、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising an adhesion promoter.
- 前記光酸発生剤が、オキシムスルホネート系光酸発生剤およびイミドスルホネート系光酸発生剤から選ばれる少なくとも1種である、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 6. The photosensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the photoacid generator is at least one selected from an oxime sulfonate photoacid generator and an imide sulfonate photoacid generator.
- 酸分解性基が、酸の作用により脱離する基、または-C(R5)2-COOR4である、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物;ただし、R5は、それぞれ独立に水素原子、または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R4は、酸の作用により脱離する基を表す。 The photosensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the acid-decomposable group is a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid, or —C (R 5 ) 2 —COOR 4 ; R 5 independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 4 represents a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid.
- 酸の作用により脱離する基が、ビニルエーテル系の置換基である、請求項7に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to claim 7, wherein the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is a vinyl ether-based substituent.
- 酸の作用により脱離する基が、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルコキシアルキル基、アルキルシリル基、アセタールを構成する基、またはケタールを構成する基である、請求項7に記載の感光性樹脂組成物。 The photosensitive resin composition according to claim 7, wherein the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an alkylsilyl group, a group constituting an acetal, or a group constituting a ketal.
- 請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物を基板の少なくとも一方の面に塗布する工程、
塗布された感光性樹脂組成物から溶剤を除去する工程、
溶剤が除去された感光性樹脂組成物を活性光線により露光する工程、
露光された感光性樹脂組成物を水性現像液により現像する工程、および
現像された感光性樹脂組成物を熱硬化するポストベーク工程、
を含む硬化膜の製造方法。 Applying the photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9 to at least one surface of a substrate;
Removing the solvent from the applied photosensitive resin composition;
Exposing the photosensitive resin composition from which the solvent has been removed with actinic rays,
A step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin composition with an aqueous developer, and a post-baking step of thermosetting the developed photosensitive resin composition;
The manufacturing method of the cured film containing this. - 前記現像する工程後、前記ポストベーク工程前に、現像された感光性樹脂組成物を全面露光する工程を含む、請求項10に記載の硬化膜の製造方法。 The manufacturing method of the cured film of Claim 10 including the process of exposing the developed photosensitive resin composition to the whole surface after the said image development process and before the said post-baking process.
- 請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の感光性樹脂組成物を硬化してなる硬化膜または請求項10または11に記載の方法により形成された硬化膜。 A cured film formed by curing the photosensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, or a cured film formed by the method according to claim 10 or 11.
- 層間絶縁膜である、請求項12に記載の硬化膜。 The cured film according to claim 12, which is an interlayer insulating film.
- 請求項12または13に記載の硬化膜を有する液晶表示装置。 A liquid crystal display device having the cured film according to claim 12.
- 請求項12または13に記載の硬化膜を有する有機EL表示装置。 An organic EL display device having the cured film according to claim 12.
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2015552438A JP6279614B2 (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2014-12-08 | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device |
CN201480066808.8A CN105814488B (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2014-12-08 | Photosensitive polymer combination, the manufacturing method of cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic EL display device |
KR1020167015307A KR101807630B1 (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2014-12-08 | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2013256035 | 2013-12-11 | ||
JP2013-256035 | 2013-12-11 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2015087831A1 true WO2015087831A1 (en) | 2015-06-18 |
Family
ID=53371136
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2014/082413 WO2015087831A1 (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2014-12-08 | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP6279614B2 (en) |
KR (1) | KR101807630B1 (en) |
CN (1) | CN105814488B (en) |
TW (1) | TWI650609B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2015087831A1 (en) |
Cited By (12)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2017040760A (en) * | 2015-08-19 | 2017-02-23 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic electroluminescence display device and touch panel |
KR20170026275A (en) | 2015-08-31 | 2017-03-08 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Photosensitive composition, method for manufacturing cured film, method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device, method for manufacturing organic electroluminescent display device, and method for manufacturing touch panel |
WO2018101376A1 (en) * | 2016-11-30 | 2018-06-07 | 三菱瓦斯化学株式会社 | Compound, resin, composition, resist pattern formation method, and circuit pattern formation method |
JP2018097210A (en) * | 2016-12-14 | 2018-06-21 | 日立化成デュポンマイクロシステムズ株式会社 | Positive photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured pattern, cured product, interlayer insulating film, cover coat layer, surface protection film, and electronic component |
JPWO2017115606A1 (en) * | 2015-12-28 | 2018-08-02 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic electroluminescence display device, and touch panel |
CN108473679A (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2018-08-31 | 东丽株式会社 | Cured film and its manufacturing method |
CN108884316A (en) * | 2016-03-22 | 2018-11-23 | 日产化学株式会社 | For manufacturing the polyhydroxyamide composition and polybenzoxazole resin film of substrate for electronic device |
JP2019008014A (en) * | 2017-06-21 | 2019-01-17 | 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 | Photosensitive colored composition for color filter and color filter |
WO2020116336A1 (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2020-06-11 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, cured film, multilayer body and device |
WO2020116238A1 (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2020-06-11 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Pattern forming method, photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, and device |
EP3951499A1 (en) * | 2020-08-04 | 2022-02-09 | Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. | Negative photosensitive resin composition, patterning process, method for forming cured film, interlayer insulation film, surface protective film, and electronic component |
US12085856B2 (en) | 2020-08-04 | 2024-09-10 | Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. | Positive photosensitive resin composition, positive photosensitive dry film, method for producing positive photosensitive dry film, patterning process, method for forming cured film, interlayer insulation film, surface protective film, and electronic component |
Families Citing this family (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2018084149A1 (en) * | 2016-11-02 | 2018-05-11 | 東レ株式会社 | Resin composition, resin sheet, cured film, organic el display device, semiconductor electronic component, semiconductor device, and method for producing organic el display device |
JP2022151614A (en) * | 2021-03-23 | 2022-10-07 | 信越化学工業株式会社 | Negative type photosensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, cured film formation method, interlayer insulating film, surface protective film, and electronic component |
CN113388075B (en) * | 2021-06-11 | 2023-03-24 | 珠海赛纳三维科技有限公司 | Composition for 3D printing, 3D printing method and device |
TWI833210B (en) * | 2022-04-28 | 2024-02-21 | 臺灣永光化學工業股份有限公司 | Chemically amplified positive photoresist composition |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2001166484A (en) * | 1999-09-28 | 2001-06-22 | Hitachi Chemical Dupont Microsystems Ltd | Positive photosensitive resin composition, method of producing pattern, and electronic parts |
JP2003241377A (en) * | 2002-02-18 | 2003-08-27 | Kyocera Chemical Corp | Photosensitive resin composition and pattern forming method |
JP2005017666A (en) * | 2003-06-26 | 2005-01-20 | Clariant Internatl Ltd | Photosensitive resin composition |
JP2008224970A (en) * | 2007-03-12 | 2008-09-25 | Fujifilm Corp | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured relief pattern using the same, and semiconductor device |
JP2010211109A (en) * | 2009-03-12 | 2010-09-24 | Asahi Kasei E-Materials Corp | Positive photosensitive resin composition, and method of producing resin pattern by using the same |
Family Cites Families (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2004170611A (en) | 2002-11-19 | 2004-06-17 | Hitachi Chemical Dupont Microsystems Ltd | Positive photosensitive resin composition, method of manufacturing relief pattern and electronic parts |
JP5518743B2 (en) | 2008-02-04 | 2014-06-11 | フジフィルム・エレクトロニック・マテリアルズ・ユーエスエイ・インコーポレイテッド | Novel positive photosensitive resin composition |
JP5451570B2 (en) | 2009-10-16 | 2014-03-26 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, method for forming cured film, cured film, organic EL display device, and liquid crystal display device |
JP5454321B2 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2014-03-26 | Jsr株式会社 | Positive radiation-sensitive composition, interlayer insulating film and method for forming the same |
-
2014
- 2014-12-08 CN CN201480066808.8A patent/CN105814488B/en active Active
- 2014-12-08 KR KR1020167015307A patent/KR101807630B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2014-12-08 JP JP2015552438A patent/JP6279614B2/en active Active
- 2014-12-08 WO PCT/JP2014/082413 patent/WO2015087831A1/en active Application Filing
- 2014-12-10 TW TW103142936A patent/TWI650609B/en active
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2001166484A (en) * | 1999-09-28 | 2001-06-22 | Hitachi Chemical Dupont Microsystems Ltd | Positive photosensitive resin composition, method of producing pattern, and electronic parts |
JP2003241377A (en) * | 2002-02-18 | 2003-08-27 | Kyocera Chemical Corp | Photosensitive resin composition and pattern forming method |
JP2005017666A (en) * | 2003-06-26 | 2005-01-20 | Clariant Internatl Ltd | Photosensitive resin composition |
JP2008224970A (en) * | 2007-03-12 | 2008-09-25 | Fujifilm Corp | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured relief pattern using the same, and semiconductor device |
JP2010211109A (en) * | 2009-03-12 | 2010-09-24 | Asahi Kasei E-Materials Corp | Positive photosensitive resin composition, and method of producing resin pattern by using the same |
Cited By (27)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2017040760A (en) * | 2015-08-19 | 2017-02-23 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic electroluminescence display device and touch panel |
KR20170026275A (en) | 2015-08-31 | 2017-03-08 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Photosensitive composition, method for manufacturing cured film, method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device, method for manufacturing organic electroluminescent display device, and method for manufacturing touch panel |
JP2017049368A (en) * | 2015-08-31 | 2017-03-09 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured film, method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device, method for manufacturing organic electroluminescence display device, and method for manufacturing touch panel |
KR102577499B1 (en) * | 2015-08-31 | 2023-09-12 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Photosensitive composition, method for manufacturing cured film, method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device, method for manufacturing organic electroluminescent display device, and method for manufacturing touch panel |
JPWO2017115606A1 (en) * | 2015-12-28 | 2018-08-02 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic electroluminescence display device, and touch panel |
CN108473679B (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2020-12-11 | 东丽株式会社 | Cured film and method for producing same |
CN108473679A (en) * | 2016-01-15 | 2018-08-31 | 东丽株式会社 | Cured film and its manufacturing method |
JP2021178962A (en) * | 2016-03-22 | 2021-11-18 | 日産化学株式会社 | Polyhydroxyamide composition for manufacturing substrate for electronic device, and polybenzoxazole resin film |
JPWO2017164129A1 (en) * | 2016-03-22 | 2019-01-31 | 日産化学株式会社 | Polyhydroxyamide composition for manufacturing substrates for electronic devices, and polybenzoxazole resin film |
CN108884316A (en) * | 2016-03-22 | 2018-11-23 | 日产化学株式会社 | For manufacturing the polyhydroxyamide composition and polybenzoxazole resin film of substrate for electronic device |
CN108884316B (en) * | 2016-03-22 | 2021-09-24 | 日产化学株式会社 | Polyhydroxyamide composition for producing substrate for electronic device, and polybenzoxazole resin film |
JPWO2018101376A1 (en) * | 2016-11-30 | 2019-10-24 | 三菱瓦斯化学株式会社 | Compound, resin, composition, resist pattern forming method, and circuit pattern forming method |
WO2018101376A1 (en) * | 2016-11-30 | 2018-06-07 | 三菱瓦斯化学株式会社 | Compound, resin, composition, resist pattern formation method, and circuit pattern formation method |
JP7205715B2 (en) | 2016-11-30 | 2023-01-17 | 三菱瓦斯化学株式会社 | Compound, resin, composition, resist pattern forming method and circuit pattern forming method |
JP2018097210A (en) * | 2016-12-14 | 2018-06-21 | 日立化成デュポンマイクロシステムズ株式会社 | Positive photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured pattern, cured product, interlayer insulating film, cover coat layer, surface protection film, and electronic component |
JP2019008014A (en) * | 2017-06-21 | 2019-01-17 | 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 | Photosensitive colored composition for color filter and color filter |
JPWO2020116336A1 (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2021-10-14 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, cured film, laminate, and device |
JPWO2020116238A1 (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2021-10-14 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Pattern formation method, photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, and device |
KR20210090206A (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2021-07-19 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, cured film, laminate, and device |
JP7078749B2 (en) | 2018-12-05 | 2022-05-31 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, cured film, laminate, and device |
WO2020116238A1 (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2020-06-11 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Pattern forming method, photosensitive resin composition, cured film, laminate, and device |
JP7261818B2 (en) | 2018-12-05 | 2023-04-20 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | PATTERN FORMATION METHOD, PHOTOSENSITIVE RESIN COMPOSITION, CURED FILM, LAYER, AND DEVICE |
WO2020116336A1 (en) * | 2018-12-05 | 2020-06-11 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, cured film, multilayer body and device |
KR102577538B1 (en) | 2018-12-05 | 2023-09-12 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, cured film, laminate, and device |
US12078929B2 (en) | 2018-12-05 | 2024-09-03 | Fujifilm Corporation | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, cured film, laminate, and device |
EP3951499A1 (en) * | 2020-08-04 | 2022-02-09 | Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. | Negative photosensitive resin composition, patterning process, method for forming cured film, interlayer insulation film, surface protective film, and electronic component |
US12085856B2 (en) | 2020-08-04 | 2024-09-10 | Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. | Positive photosensitive resin composition, positive photosensitive dry film, method for producing positive photosensitive dry film, patterning process, method for forming cured film, interlayer insulation film, surface protective film, and electronic component |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
KR20160085304A (en) | 2016-07-15 |
KR101807630B1 (en) | 2017-12-11 |
JPWO2015087831A1 (en) | 2017-03-16 |
TW201527877A (en) | 2015-07-16 |
CN105814488A (en) | 2016-07-27 |
CN105814488B (en) | 2019-11-05 |
TWI650609B (en) | 2019-02-11 |
JP6279614B2 (en) | 2018-02-14 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6279614B2 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device | |
WO2015087830A1 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device | |
JP5593405B2 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, organic EL display device and liquid crystal display device | |
JP6096202B2 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition and method for producing pattern using the same | |
JP6038951B2 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, organic EL display device and liquid crystal display device | |
WO2016043203A1 (en) | Positive photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, organic electroluminescent display device and touch panel | |
JP5941543B2 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, organic EL display device and liquid crystal display device | |
JP5914663B2 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, organic EL display device and liquid crystal display device | |
WO2015064556A1 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern manufacturing method, cured film, organic el display device manufacturing method, and liquid crystal display device manufacturing method | |
JP6272338B2 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device | |
KR101747771B1 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device | |
JP5933735B2 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, organic EL display device and liquid crystal display device | |
WO2015064555A1 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, pattern manufacturing method, cured film, organic el display device manufacturing method, and liquid crystal display device manufacturing method | |
JP2014010200A (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured film, cured film, organic electroluminescence (el) display device, and liquid crystal display device | |
WO2015087832A1 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device | |
WO2013191155A1 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for manufacturing cured film, cured film, organic el display device, and liquid crystal display device | |
JP2015094898A (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device | |
JP2014071308A (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, production method of cured film using the composition, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic electroluminescence display device | |
WO2014175316A1 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, cured product and method for producing same, method for producing resin pattern, cured film, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device | |
WO2015087829A1 (en) | Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic el display device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 14869400 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2015552438 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A Ref document number: 20167015307 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 14869400 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |